o Initial start of radio controller.

13 files changed, 14957 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e0af69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal.c
@@ -0,0 +1,526 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   HAL module driver.
+  *          This is the common part of the HAL initialization
+  *
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                     ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+    The common HAL driver contains a set of generic and common APIs that can be
+    used by the PPP peripheral drivers and the user to start using the HAL. 
+    [..]
+    The HAL contains two APIs' categories: 
+         (+) Common HAL APIs
+         (+) Services HAL APIs
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL HAL
+  * @brief HAL module driver.
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Private_Constants HAL Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+ * @brief STM32F1xx HAL Driver version number
+   */
+#define __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_MAIN   (0x01) /*!< [31:24] main version */
+#define __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB1   (0x00) /*!< [23:16] sub1 version */
+#define __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB2   (0x04) /*!< [15:8]  sub2 version */
+#define __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_RC     (0x00) /*!< [7:0]  release candidate */
+#define __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION         ((__STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_MAIN << 24)\
+                                        |(__STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB1 << 16)\
+                                        |(__STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_SUB2 << 8 )\
+                                        |(__STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION_RC))
+
+#define IDCODE_DEVID_MASK    ((uint32_t)0x00000FFF)
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Private_Variables HAL Private Variables
+  * @{
+  */
+
+static __IO uint32_t uwTick;
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions HAL Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization Functions 
+ *  @brief    Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+              ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+   [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Initializes the Flash interface, the NVIC allocation and initial clock 
+          configuration. It initializes the source of time base also when timeout 
+          is needed and the backup domain when enabled.
+      (+) de-Initializes common part of the HAL.
+      (+) Configure The time base source to have 1ms time base with a dedicated 
+          Tick interrupt priority. 
+        (++) Systick timer is used by default as source of time base, but user 
+             can eventually implement his proper time base source (a general purpose 
+             timer for example or other time source), keeping in mind that Time base 
+             duration should be kept 1ms since PPP_TIMEOUT_VALUEs are defined and 
+             handled in milliseconds basis.
+        (++) Time base configuration function (HAL_InitTick ()) is called automatically 
+             at the beginning of the program after reset by HAL_Init() or at any time 
+             when clock is configured, by HAL_RCC_ClockConfig(). 
+        (++) Source of time base is configured  to generate interrupts at regular 
+             time intervals. Care must be taken if HAL_Delay() is called from a 
+             peripheral ISR process, the Tick interrupt line must have higher priority 
+            (numerically lower) than the peripheral interrupt. Otherwise the caller 
+            ISR process will be blocked. 
+       (++) functions affecting time base configurations are declared as __Weak  
+             to make  override possible  in case of other  implementations in user file.
+ 
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function configures the Flash prefetch, 
+  *        Configures time base source, NVIC and Low level hardware
+  * @note This function is called at the beginning of program after reset and before 
+  *       the clock configuration
+  * @note The time base configuration is based on MSI clock when exiting from Reset.
+  *       Once done, time base tick start incrementing.
+  *        In the default implementation,Systick is used as source of time base.
+  *       The tick variable is incremented each 1ms in its ISR.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_Init(void)
+{
+  /* Configure Flash prefetch */
+#if (PREFETCH_ENABLE != 0)
+#if defined(STM32F101x6) || defined(STM32F101xB) || defined(STM32F101xE) || defined(STM32F101xG) || \
+    defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || \
+    defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+
+  /* Prefetch buffer is not available on value line devices */
+  __HAL_FLASH_PREFETCH_BUFFER_ENABLE();
+#endif
+#endif /* PREFETCH_ENABLE */
+
+  /* Set Interrupt Group Priority */
+  HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4);
+
+  /* Use systick as time base source and configure 1ms tick (default clock after Reset is MSI) */
+  HAL_InitTick(TICK_INT_PRIORITY);
+
+  /* Init the low level hardware */
+  HAL_MspInit();
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function de-Initializes common part of the HAL and stops the source
+  *        of time base.
+  * @note This function is optional.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DeInit(void)
+{
+  /* Reset of all peripherals */
+  __HAL_RCC_APB1_FORCE_RESET();
+  __HAL_RCC_APB1_RELEASE_RESET();
+
+  __HAL_RCC_APB2_FORCE_RESET();
+  __HAL_RCC_APB2_RELEASE_RESET();
+
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  __HAL_RCC_AHB_FORCE_RESET();
+  __HAL_RCC_AHB_RELEASE_RESET();
+#endif
+  
+  /* De-Init the low level hardware */
+  HAL_MspDeInit();
+    
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the MSP.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_MspInit(void)
+{
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the MSP.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_MspDeInit(void)
+{
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function configures the source of the time base. 
+  *        The time source is configured  to have 1ms time base with a dedicated 
+  *        Tick interrupt priority.
+  * @note This function is called  automatically at the beginning of program after
+  *       reset by HAL_Init() or at any time when clock is reconfigured  by HAL_RCC_ClockConfig(). 
+  * @note In the default implementation, SysTick timer is the source of time base. 
+  *       It is used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals. 
+  *       Care must be taken if HAL_Delay() is called from a peripheral ISR process, 
+  *       The the SysTick interrupt must have higher priority (numerically lower) 
+  *       than the peripheral interrupt. Otherwise the caller ISR process will be blocked.
+  *       The function is declared as __Weak  to be overwritten  in case of other
+  *       implementation  in user file.
+  * @param TickPriority: Tick interrupt priority.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+__weak HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_InitTick(uint32_t TickPriority)
+{
+  /*Configure the SysTick to have interrupt in 1ms time basis*/
+  HAL_SYSTICK_Config(HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq()/1000);
+
+  /*Configure the SysTick IRQ priority */
+  HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(SysTick_IRQn, TickPriority ,0);
+
+   /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup HAL_Exported_Functions_Group2 HAL Control functions 
+ *  @brief    HAL Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+                      ##### HAL Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+    [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Provide a tick value in millisecond
+      (+) Provide a blocking delay in millisecond
+      (+) Suspend the time base source interrupt
+      (+) Resume the time base source interrupt
+      (+) Get the HAL API driver version
+      (+) Get the device identifier
+      (+) Get the device revision identifier
+      (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during Sleep mode
+      (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during STOP mode
+      (+) Enable/Disable Debug module during STANDBY mode
+      
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function is called to increment  a global variable "uwTick"
+  *        used as application time base.
+  * @note In the default implementation, this variable is incremented each 1ms
+  *       in Systick ISR.
+  * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other 
+  *      implementations in user file.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_IncTick(void)
+{
+  uwTick++;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Provides a tick value in millisecond.
+  * @note   This function is declared as __weak  to be overwritten  in case of other 
+  *       implementations in user file.
+  * @retval tick value
+  */
+__weak uint32_t HAL_GetTick(void)
+{
+  return uwTick;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function provides accurate delay (in milliseconds) based 
+  *        on variable incremented.
+  * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base.
+  *       It is used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals where uwTick
+  *       is incremented.
+  * @note ThiS function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+  *       implementations in user file.
+  * @param Delay: specifies the delay time length, in milliseconds.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_Delay(__IO uint32_t Delay)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+  tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+  while((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) < Delay)
+  {
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Suspend Tick increment.
+  * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base. It is
+  *       used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals. Once HAL_SuspendTick()
+  *       is called, the the SysTick interrupt will be disabled and so Tick increment 
+  *       is suspended.
+  * @note This function is declared as __weak to be overwritten in case of other
+  *       implementations in user file.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_SuspendTick(void)
+{
+  /* Disable SysTick Interrupt */
+  CLEAR_BIT(SysTick->CTRL,SysTick_CTRL_TICKINT_Msk);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Resume Tick increment.
+  * @note In the default implementation , SysTick timer is the source of time base. It is
+  *       used to generate interrupts at regular time intervals. Once HAL_ResumeTick()
+  *       is called, the the SysTick interrupt will be enabled and so Tick increment 
+  *       is resumed.
+  * @note This function is declared as __weak  to be overwritten  in case of other
+  *       implementations in user file.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_ResumeTick(void)
+{
+  /* Enable SysTick Interrupt */
+  SET_BIT(SysTick->CTRL,SysTick_CTRL_TICKINT_Msk);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  This method returns the HAL revision
+  * @retval version: 0xXYZR (8bits for each decimal, R for RC)
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_GetHalVersion(void)
+{
+ return __STM32F1xx_HAL_VERSION;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Returns the device revision identifier.
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval Device revision identifier
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_GetREVID(void)
+{
+  return((DBGMCU->IDCODE) >> POSITION_VAL(DBGMCU_IDCODE_REV_ID));
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the device identifier.
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval Device identifier
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_GetDEVID(void)
+{
+   return((DBGMCU->IDCODE) & IDCODE_DEVID_MASK);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable the Debug Module during SLEEP mode
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGSleepMode(void)
+{
+  SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_SLEEP);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable the Debug Module during SLEEP mode
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGSleepMode(void)
+{
+  CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_SLEEP);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable the Debug Module during STOP mode
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * Note: On all STM32F1 devices:
+  *       If the system tick timer interrupt is enabled during the Stop mode 
+  *       debug (DBG_STOP bit set in the DBGMCU_CR register ), it will wakeup
+  *       the system from Stop mode.
+  *       Workaround: To debug the Stop mode, disable the system tick timer 
+  *       interrupt.
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * Note: On all STM32F1 devices:
+  *       If the system tick timer interrupt is enabled during the Stop mode  
+  *       debug (DBG_STOP bit set in the DBGMCU_CR register ), it will wakeup
+  *       the system from Stop mode.
+  *       Workaround: To debug the Stop mode, disable the system tick timer
+  *       interrupt.
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGStopMode(void)
+{
+  SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STOP);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable the Debug Module during STOP mode
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGStopMode(void)
+{
+  CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STOP);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable the Debug Module during STANDBY mode
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_EnableDBGStandbyMode(void)
+{
+  SET_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STANDBY);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable the Debug Module during STANDBY mode
+  * Note: On devices STM32F10xx8 and STM32F10xxB,
+  *                  STM32F101xC/D/E and STM32F103xC/D/E,
+  *                  STM32F101xF/G and STM32F103xF/G
+  *                  STM32F10xx4 and STM32F10xx6
+  *       Debug registers DBGMCU_IDCODE and DBGMCU_CR are accessible only in 
+  *       debug mode (not accessible by the user software in normal mode).
+  *       Refer to errata sheet of these devices for more details.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DBGMCU_DisableDBGStandbyMode(void)
+{
+  CLEAR_BIT(DBGMCU->CR, DBGMCU_CR_DBG_STANDBY);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_cortex.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_cortex.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c9d886
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_cortex.c
@@ -0,0 +1,494 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_cortex.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   CORTEX HAL module driver.
+  *
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+  *          functionalities of the CORTEX:
+  *           + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+  *           + Peripheral Control functions
+  *          
+  *  @verbatim    
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+
+    [..]  
+    *** How to configure Interrupts using Cortex HAL driver ***
+    ===========================================================
+    [..]     
+    This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts (IRQ).
+    The Cortex-M3 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions.
+   
+    (#) Configure the NVIC Priority Grouping using HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping()
+        function according to the following table.
+
+     The table below gives the allowed values of the pre-emption priority and subpriority according
+     to the Priority Grouping configuration performed by HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping() function.
+       ==========================================================================================================================
+         NVIC_PriorityGroup   | NVIC_IRQChannelPreemptionPriority | NVIC_IRQChannelSubPriority  |       Description
+       ==========================================================================================================================
+        NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0  |                0                  |            0-15             | 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+                              |                                   |                             | 4 bits for subpriority
+       --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+        NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1  |                0-1                |            0-7              | 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+                              |                                   |                             | 3 bits for subpriority
+       --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    
+        NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2  |                0-3                |            0-3              | 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+                              |                                   |                             | 2 bits for subpriority
+       --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    
+        NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3  |                0-7                |            0-1              | 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+                              |                                   |                             | 1 bits for subpriority
+       --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------    
+        NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4  |                0-15               |            0                | 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+                              |                                   |                             | 0 bits for subpriority                       
+       ==========================================================================================================================
+     (#)  Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority() 
+
+     (#)  Enable the selected IRQ Channels using HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ() 
+      
+
+     -@- When the NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0 is selected, IRQ pre-emption is no more possible. 
+         The pending IRQ priority will be managed only by the sub priority.
+   
+     -@- IRQ priority order (sorted by highest to lowest priority):
+        (+@) Lowest pre-emption priority
+        (+@) Lowest sub priority
+        (+@) Lowest hardware priority (IRQ number)
+ 
+    [..]  
+    *** How to configure Systick using Cortex HAL driver ***
+    ========================================================
+    [..]
+    Setup SysTick Timer for 1 msec interrupts.
+           
+   (+) The HAL_SYSTICK_Config()function calls the SysTick_Config() function which
+       is a CMSIS function that:
+        (++) Configures the SysTick Reload register with value passed as function parameter.
+        (++) Configures the SysTick IRQ priority to the lowest value (0x0F).
+        (++) Resets the SysTick Counter register.
+        (++) Configures the SysTick Counter clock source to be Core Clock Source (HCLK).
+        (++) Enables the SysTick Interrupt.
+        (++) Starts the SysTick Counter.
+    
+   (+) You can change the SysTick Clock source to be HCLK_Div8 by calling the function
+       HAL_SYSTICK_CLKSourceConfig(SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK_DIV8) just after the
+       HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function call.
+
+   (+) You can change the SysTick IRQ priority by calling the
+       HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(SysTick_IRQn,...) function just after the HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function 
+       call. The HAL_NVIC_SetPriority() call the NVIC_SetPriority() function which is a CMSIS function.
+
+   (+) To adjust the SysTick time base, use the following formula:
+                            
+       Reload Value = SysTick Counter Clock (Hz) x  Desired Time base (s)
+       (++) Reload Value is the parameter to be passed for HAL_SYSTICK_Config() function
+       (++) Reload Value should not exceed 0xFFFFFF
+   
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX CORTEX
+  * @brief CORTEX HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_CORTEX_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions CORTEX Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *  @brief    Initialization and Configuration functions 
+ *
+@verbatim    
+  ==============================================================================
+              ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+      This section provide the Cortex HAL driver functions allowing to configure Interrupts
+      Systick functionalities 
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Sets the priority grouping field (pre-emption priority and subpriority)
+  *         using the required unlock sequence.
+  * @param  PriorityGroup: The priority grouping bits length. 
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *         @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                    4 bits for subpriority
+  *         @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                    3 bits for subpriority
+  *         @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                    2 bits for subpriority
+  *         @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                    1 bits for subpriority
+  *         @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                    0 bits for subpriority
+  * @note   When the NVIC_PriorityGroup_0 is selected, IRQ pre-emption is no more possible. 
+  *         The pending IRQ priority will be managed only by the subpriority. 
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(uint32_t PriorityGroup)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(PriorityGroup));
+  
+  /* Set the PRIGROUP[10:8] bits according to the PriorityGroup parameter value */
+  NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(PriorityGroup);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Sets the priority of an interrupt.
+  * @param  IRQn: External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))
+  * @param  PreemptPriority: The pre-emption priority for the IRQn channel.
+  *         This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15
+  *         A lower priority value indicates a higher priority 
+  * @param  SubPriority: the subpriority level for the IRQ channel.
+  *         This parameter can be a value between 0 and 15
+  *         A lower priority value indicates a higher priority.          
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPriority(IRQn_Type IRQn, uint32_t PreemptPriority, uint32_t SubPriority)
+{
+  uint32_t prioritygroup = 0x00;
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_SUB_PRIORITY(SubPriority));
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_PREEMPTION_PRIORITY(PreemptPriority));
+  
+  prioritygroup = NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping();
+  
+  NVIC_SetPriority(IRQn, NVIC_EncodePriority(prioritygroup, PreemptPriority, SubPriority));
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables a device specific interrupt in the NVIC interrupt controller.
+  * @note   To configure interrupts priority correctly, the NVIC_PriorityGroupConfig()
+  *         function should be called before. 
+  * @param  IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_DEVICE_IRQ(IRQn));
+
+  /* Enable interrupt */
+  NVIC_EnableIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disables a device specific interrupt in the NVIC interrupt controller.
+  * @param  IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_DisableIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_DEVICE_IRQ(IRQn));
+
+
+  /* Disable interrupt */
+  NVIC_DisableIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initiates a system reset request to reset the MCU.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_SystemReset(void)
+{
+  /* System Reset */
+  NVIC_SystemReset();
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the System Timer and its interrupt, and starts the System Tick Timer.
+  *         Counter is in free running mode to generate periodic interrupts.
+  * @param  TicksNumb: Specifies the ticks Number of ticks between two interrupts.
+  * @retval status:  - 0  Function succeeded.
+  *                  - 1  Function failed.
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_SYSTICK_Config(uint32_t TicksNumb)
+{
+   return SysTick_Config(TicksNumb);
+}
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup CORTEX_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+ *  @brief    Cortex control functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+  ==============================================================================
+                      ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+      This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the CORTEX
+      (NVIC, SYSTICK, MPU) functionalities. 
+ 
+      
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#if (__MPU_PRESENT == 1)
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes and configures the Region and the memory to be protected.
+  * @param  MPU_Init: Pointer to a MPU_Region_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the initialization and configuration information.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_MPU_ConfigRegion(MPU_Region_InitTypeDef *MPU_Init)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_NUMBER(MPU_Init->Number));
+  assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_ENABLE(MPU_Init->Enable));
+
+  /* Set the Region number */
+  MPU->RNR = MPU_Init->Number;
+
+  if ((MPU_Init->Enable) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_INSTRUCTION_ACCESS(MPU_Init->DisableExec));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_PERMISSION_ATTRIBUTE(MPU_Init->AccessPermission));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_TEX_LEVEL(MPU_Init->TypeExtField));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_SHAREABLE(MPU_Init->IsShareable));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_CACHEABLE(MPU_Init->IsCacheable));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_ACCESS_BUFFERABLE(MPU_Init->IsBufferable));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_SUB_REGION_DISABLE(MPU_Init->SubRegionDisable));
+    assert_param(IS_MPU_REGION_SIZE(MPU_Init->Size));
+    
+    MPU->RBAR = MPU_Init->BaseAddress;
+    MPU->RASR = ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->DisableExec             << MPU_RASR_XN_Pos)   |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->AccessPermission        << MPU_RASR_AP_Pos)   |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->TypeExtField            << MPU_RASR_TEX_Pos)  |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsShareable             << MPU_RASR_S_Pos)    |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsCacheable             << MPU_RASR_C_Pos)    |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->IsBufferable            << MPU_RASR_B_Pos)    |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->SubRegionDisable        << MPU_RASR_SRD_Pos)  |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->Size                    << MPU_RASR_SIZE_Pos) |
+                ((uint32_t)MPU_Init->Enable                  << MPU_RASR_ENABLE_Pos);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    MPU->RBAR = 0x00;
+    MPU->RASR = 0x00;
+  }
+}
+#endif /* __MPU_PRESENT */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Gets the priority grouping field from the NVIC Interrupt Controller.
+  * @retval Priority grouping field (SCB->AIRCR [10:8] PRIGROUP field)
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping(void)
+{
+  /* Get the PRIGROUP[10:8] field value */
+  return NVIC_GetPriorityGrouping();
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Gets the priority of an interrupt.
+  * @param  IRQn: External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))
+  * @param   PriorityGroup: the priority grouping bits length.
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *           @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_0: 0 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                      4 bits for subpriority
+  *           @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_1: 1 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                      3 bits for subpriority
+  *           @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_2: 2 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                      2 bits for subpriority
+  *           @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_3: 3 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                      1 bits for subpriority
+  *           @arg NVIC_PRIORITYGROUP_4: 4 bits for pre-emption priority
+  *                                      0 bits for subpriority
+  * @param  pPreemptPriority: Pointer on the Preemptive priority value (starting from 0).
+  * @param  pSubPriority: Pointer on the Subpriority value (starting from 0).
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_GetPriority(IRQn_Type IRQn, uint32_t PriorityGroup, uint32_t* pPreemptPriority, uint32_t* pSubPriority)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY_GROUP(PriorityGroup));
+ /* Get priority for Cortex-M system or device specific interrupts */
+  NVIC_DecodePriority(NVIC_GetPriority(IRQn), PriorityGroup, pPreemptPriority, pSubPriority);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Sets Pending bit of an external interrupt.
+  * @param  IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_SetPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{ 
+  /* Set interrupt pending */
+  NVIC_SetPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Gets Pending Interrupt (reads the pending register in the NVIC 
+  *         and returns the pending bit for the specified interrupt).
+  * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))  
+  * @retval status: - 0  Interrupt status is not pending.
+  *                 - 1  Interrupt status is pending.
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{ 
+  /* Return 1 if pending else 0 */
+  return NVIC_GetPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Clears the pending bit of an external interrupt.
+  * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_NVIC_ClearPendingIRQ(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{ 
+  /* Clear pending interrupt */
+  NVIC_ClearPendingIRQ(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Gets active interrupt ( reads the active register in NVIC and returns the active bit).
+  * @param IRQn External interrupt number
+  *         This parameter can be an enumerator of IRQn_Type enumeration
+  *         (For the complete STM32 Devices IRQ Channels list, please refer to the appropriate CMSIS device file (stm32f10xxx.h))  
+  * @retval status: - 0  Interrupt status is not pending.
+  *                 - 1  Interrupt status is pending.
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_NVIC_GetActive(IRQn_Type IRQn)
+{ 
+  /* Return 1 if active else 0 */
+  return NVIC_GetActive(IRQn);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the SysTick clock source.
+  * @param  CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source.
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *             @arg SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK_DIV8: AHB clock divided by 8 selected as SysTick clock source.
+  *             @arg SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK: AHB clock selected as SysTick clock source.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_SYSTICK_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t CLKSource)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(CLKSource));
+  if (CLKSource == SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK)
+  {
+    SysTick->CTRL |= SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    SysTick->CTRL &= ~SYSTICK_CLKSOURCE_HCLK;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  This function handles SYSTICK interrupt request.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_SYSTICK_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+  HAL_SYSTICK_Callback();
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  SYSTICK callback.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_SYSTICK_Callback(void)
+{
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_SYSTICK_Callback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_CORTEX_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_dma.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_dma.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a48d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_dma.c
@@ -0,0 +1,709 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_dma.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   DMA HAL module driver.
+  *    
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the Direct Memory Access (DMA) peripheral:
+  *           + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+  *           + IO operation functions
+  *           + Peripheral State and errors functions
+  @verbatim     
+  ==============================================================================      
+                        ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ============================================================================== 
+  [..]
+   (#) Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA Channel
+       (except for internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is 
+       necessary) please refer to Reference manual for connection between peripherals
+       and DMA requests.
+
+   (#) For a given Channel, program the required configuration through the following parameters:   
+       Transfer Direction, Source and Destination data formats, 
+       Circular or Normal mode, Channel Priority level, Source and Destination Increment mode, 
+       using HAL_DMA_Init() function.
+
+   (#) Use HAL_DMA_GetState() function to return the DMA state and HAL_DMA_GetError() in case of error 
+       detection.
+                    
+   (#) Use HAL_DMA_Abort() function to abort the current transfer
+                   
+     -@-   In Memory-to-Memory transfer mode, Circular mode is not allowed.
+     *** Polling mode IO operation ***
+     =================================   
+    [..] 
+      (+) Use HAL_DMA_Start() to start DMA transfer after the configuration of Source 
+          address and destination address and the Length of data to be transferred
+      (+) Use HAL_DMA_PollForTransfer() to poll for the end of current transfer, in this  
+          case a fixed Timeout can be configured by User depending from his application.
+
+     *** Interrupt mode IO operation ***    
+     =================================== 
+    [..]
+      (+) Configure the DMA interrupt priority using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority()
+      (+) Enable the DMA IRQ handler using HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ() 
+      (+) Use HAL_DMA_Start_IT() to start DMA transfer after the configuration of  
+          Source address and destination address and the Length of data to be transferred. 
+          In this case the DMA interrupt is configured 
+      (+) Use HAL_DMAy_Channelx_IRQHandler() called under DMA_IRQHandler() Interrupt subroutine
+      (+) At the end of data transfer HAL_DMA_IRQHandler() function is executed and user can 
+          add his own function by customization of function pointer XferCpltCallback and 
+          XferErrorCallback (i.e a member of DMA handle structure). 
+
+     *** DMA HAL driver macros list ***
+     ============================================= 
+     [..]
+       Below the list of most used macros in DMA HAL driver.
+
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_ENABLE: Enable the specified DMA Channel.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_DISABLE: Disable the specified DMA Channel.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG: Get the DMA Channel pending flags.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG: Clear the DMA Channel pending flags.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT: Enable the specified DMA Channel interrupts.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT: Disable the specified DMA Channel interrupts.
+       (+) __HAL_DMA_GET_IT_SOURCE: Check whether the specified DMA Channel interrupt has occurred or not. 
+
+     [..] 
+      (@) You can refer to the DMA HAL driver header file for more useful macros  
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */ 
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA DMA
+  * @brief DMA HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_DMA_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup DMA_Private_Constants DMA Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+#define HAL_TIMEOUT_DMA_ABORT    ((uint32_t)1000)  /* 1s */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup DMA_Private_Functions DMA Private Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+static void DMA_SetConfig(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength);
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions DMA Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions
+ *  @brief   Initialization and de-initialization functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+             ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions  #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA Channel source
+    and destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer direction, 
+    circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory mode selection and Channel priority value.
+    [..]
+    The HAL_DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described in
+    reference manual.  
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the DMA according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the DMA_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  hdma: Pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *               the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Init(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{ 
+  uint32_t tmp = 0;
+  
+  /* Check the DMA handle allocation */
+  if(hdma == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_INSTANCE(hdma->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_DIRECTION(hdma->Init.Direction));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_INC_STATE(hdma->Init.PeriphInc));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_INC_STATE(hdma->Init.MemInc));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_DATA_SIZE(hdma->Init.PeriphDataAlignment));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_DATA_SIZE(hdma->Init.MemDataAlignment));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_MODE(hdma->Init.Mode));
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_PRIORITY(hdma->Init.Priority));
+  
+  if(hdma->State == HAL_DMA_STATE_RESET)
+  {  
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    hdma->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+  }
+  
+  /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Get the CR register value */
+  tmp = hdma->Instance->CCR;
+  
+  /* Clear PL, MSIZE, PSIZE, MINC, PINC, CIRC, DIR bits */
+  tmp &= ((uint32_t)~(DMA_CCR_PL    | DMA_CCR_MSIZE  | DMA_CCR_PSIZE  | \
+                      DMA_CCR_MINC  | DMA_CCR_PINC   | DMA_CCR_CIRC   | \
+                      DMA_CCR_DIR));
+  
+  /* Prepare the DMA Channel configuration */
+  tmp |=  hdma->Init.Direction        |
+          hdma->Init.PeriphInc           | hdma->Init.MemInc           |
+          hdma->Init.PeriphDataAlignment | hdma->Init.MemDataAlignment |
+          hdma->Init.Mode                | hdma->Init.Priority;
+
+  /* Write to DMA Channel CR register */
+  hdma->Instance->CCR = tmp;  
+  
+  /* Initialise the error code */
+  hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+  /* Initialize the DMA state*/
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the DMA peripheral 
+  * @param  hdma: pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *               the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_DeInit(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  /* Check the DMA handle allocation */
+  if(hdma == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_INSTANCE(hdma->Instance));
+
+  /* Check the DMA peripheral state */
+  if(hdma->State == HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY)
+  {
+     return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the selected DMA Channelx */
+  __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+  
+  /* Reset DMA Channel control register */
+  hdma->Instance->CCR  = 0;
+  
+  /* Reset DMA Channel Number of Data to Transfer register */
+  hdma->Instance->CNDTR = 0;
+  
+  /* Reset DMA Channel peripheral address register */
+  hdma->Instance->CPAR  = 0;
+  
+  /* Reset DMA Channel memory address register */
+  hdma->Instance->CMAR = 0;
+
+  /* Clear all flags */
+  __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TC_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+  __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TE_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+  __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_HT_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+  
+  /* Initialize the error code */
+  hdma->ErrorCode = HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE;
+
+  /* Initialize the DMA state */
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group2 Input and Output operation functions 
+ *  @brief   I/O operation functions  
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                      #####  IO operation functions  #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Configure the source, destination address and data length and Start DMA transfer
+      (+) Configure the source, destination address and data length and 
+          Start DMA transfer with interrupt
+      (+) Abort DMA transfer
+      (+) Poll for transfer complete
+      (+) Handle DMA interrupt request  
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the DMA Transfer.
+  * @param  hdma      : pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                     the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @param  SrcAddress: The source memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DstAddress: The destination memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DataLength: The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Start(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+  /* Process locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+  /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+
+   /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DataLength));
+  
+  /* Disable the peripheral */
+  __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+  
+  /* Configure the source, destination address and the data length */
+  DMA_SetConfig(hdma, SrcAddress, DstAddress, DataLength);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_DMA_ENABLE(hdma);
+
+  return HAL_OK; 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Start the DMA Transfer with interrupt enabled.
+  * @param  hdma:       pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                     the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @param  SrcAddress: The source memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DstAddress: The destination memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DataLength: The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Start_IT(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+  /* Process locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(hdma);
+
+  /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_BUSY;
+
+   /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DataLength));
+  
+  /* Disable the peripheral */
+  __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+  
+  /* Configure the source, destination address and the data length */
+  DMA_SetConfig(hdma, SrcAddress, DstAddress, DataLength);
+  
+  /* Enable the transfer complete interrupt */
+  __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_TC);
+
+  /* Enable the Half transfer complete interrupt */
+  __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_HT);  
+
+  /* Enable the transfer Error interrupt */
+  __HAL_DMA_ENABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_TE);
+  
+   /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_DMA_ENABLE(hdma);
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+} 
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Aborts the DMA Transfer.
+  * @param  hdma  : pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                 the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+  *                   
+  * @note  After disabling a DMA Channel, a check for wait until the DMA Channel is 
+  *        effectively disabled is added. If a Channel is disabled 
+  *        while a data transfer is ongoing, the current data will be transferred
+  *        and the Channel will be effectively disabled only after the transfer of
+  *        this single data is finished.  
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_Abort(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0x00;
+  
+  /* Disable the channel */
+  __HAL_DMA_DISABLE(hdma);
+
+  /* Get tick */
+  tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+  
+  /* Check if the DMA Channel is effectively disabled */
+  while((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_EN) != 0)
+  {
+    /* Check for the Timeout */
+    if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > HAL_TIMEOUT_DMA_ABORT)
+    {
+      /* Update error code */
+      SET_BIT(hdma->ErrorCode, HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT);
+
+      /* Change the DMA state */
+      hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_TIMEOUT;
+
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+      return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Change the DMA state */
+  hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+  
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Polling for transfer complete.
+  * @param  hdma:    pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                  the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+  * @param  CompleteLevel: Specifies the DMA level complete.  
+  * @param  Timeout:       Timeout duration.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_DMA_PollForTransfer(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t CompleteLevel, uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+  uint32_t temp;
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0x00;
+  
+  /* Get the level transfer complete flag */
+  if(CompleteLevel == HAL_DMA_FULL_TRANSFER)
+  {
+    /* Transfer Complete flag */
+    temp = __HAL_DMA_GET_TC_FLAG_INDEX(hdma);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Half Transfer Complete flag */
+    temp = __HAL_DMA_GET_HT_FLAG_INDEX(hdma);
+  }
+
+  /* Get tick */
+  tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+  while(__HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG(hdma, temp) == RESET)
+  {
+    if((__HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TE_FLAG_INDEX(hdma)) != RESET))
+    {      
+      /* Clear the transfer error flags */
+      __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TE_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+      
+      /* Update error code */
+      SET_BIT(hdma->ErrorCode, HAL_DMA_ERROR_TE);
+
+      /* Change the DMA state */
+      hdma->State= HAL_DMA_STATE_ERROR;
+      
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+      
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    /* Check for the Timeout */
+    if(Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+    {
+      if((Timeout == 0) || ((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > Timeout))
+      {
+        /* Update error code */
+        SET_BIT(hdma->ErrorCode, HAL_DMA_ERROR_TIMEOUT);
+        
+        /* Change the DMA state */
+        hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_TIMEOUT;
+
+        /* Process Unlocked */
+        __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+        
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(CompleteLevel == HAL_DMA_FULL_TRANSFER)
+  {
+    /* Clear the transfer complete flag */
+    __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TC_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+
+    /* The selected Channelx EN bit is cleared (DMA is disabled and 
+    all transfers are complete) */
+    hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+
+  }
+  else
+  { 
+    /* Clear the half transfer complete flag */
+    __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_HT_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+  
+    /* The selected Channelx EN bit is cleared (DMA is disabled and 
+    all transfers of half buffer are complete) */
+    hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY_HALF;
+  }
+  
+  /* Process unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Handles DMA interrupt request.
+  * @param  hdma: pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *               the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_DMA_IRQHandler(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  /* Transfer Error Interrupt management ***************************************/
+  if(__HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TE_FLAG_INDEX(hdma)) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_DMA_GET_IT_SOURCE(hdma, DMA_IT_TE) != RESET)
+    {
+      /* Disable the transfer error interrupt */
+      __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_TE);
+      
+      /* Clear the transfer error flag */
+      __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TE_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+      
+      /* Update error code */
+      SET_BIT(hdma->ErrorCode, HAL_DMA_ERROR_TE);
+      
+      /* Change the DMA state */
+      hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_ERROR;
+      
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma); 
+      
+      if (hdma->XferErrorCallback != NULL)
+      {
+        /* Transfer error callback */
+        hdma->XferErrorCallback(hdma);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Half Transfer Complete Interrupt management ******************************/
+  if(__HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_HT_FLAG_INDEX(hdma)) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_DMA_GET_IT_SOURCE(hdma, DMA_IT_HT) != RESET)
+    { 
+      /* Disable the half transfer interrupt if the DMA mode is not CIRCULAR */
+      if((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0)
+      {
+        /* Disable the half transfer interrupt */
+        __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_HT);
+      }
+      /* Clear the half transfer complete flag */
+      __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_HT_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+
+      /* Change DMA peripheral state */
+      hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY_HALF;
+
+      if(hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback != NULL)
+      {
+        /* Half transfer callback */
+        hdma->XferHalfCpltCallback(hdma);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* Transfer Complete Interrupt management ***********************************/
+  if(__HAL_DMA_GET_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TC_FLAG_INDEX(hdma)) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_DMA_GET_IT_SOURCE(hdma, DMA_IT_TC) != RESET)
+    {
+      if((hdma->Instance->CCR & DMA_CCR_CIRC) == 0)
+      {
+        /* Disable the transfer complete interrupt */
+        __HAL_DMA_DISABLE_IT(hdma, DMA_IT_TC);
+      }
+      /* Clear the transfer complete flag */
+      __HAL_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(hdma, __HAL_DMA_GET_TC_FLAG_INDEX(hdma));
+    
+      /* Update error code */
+      SET_BIT(hdma->ErrorCode, HAL_DMA_ERROR_NONE);
+
+      /* Change the DMA state */
+      hdma->State = HAL_DMA_STATE_READY;
+    
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(hdma);
+    
+      if(hdma->XferCpltCallback != NULL)
+      {       
+        /* Transfer complete callback */
+        hdma->XferCpltCallback(hdma);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral State functions
+ *  @brief    Peripheral State functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                    ##### State and Errors functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides functions allowing to
+      (+) Check the DMA state
+      (+) Get error code
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the DMA state.
+  * @param  hdma: pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *               the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_DMA_StateTypeDef HAL_DMA_GetState(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  return hdma->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the DMA error code
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *              the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+  * @retval DMA Error Code
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_DMA_GetError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  return hdma->ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup DMA_Private_Functions DMA Private Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Sets the DMA Transfer parameter.
+  * @param  hdma:       pointer to a DMA_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                     the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.  
+  * @param  SrcAddress: The source memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DstAddress: The destination memory Buffer address
+  * @param  DataLength: The length of data to be transferred from source to destination
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+static void DMA_SetConfig(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma, uint32_t SrcAddress, uint32_t DstAddress, uint32_t DataLength)
+{
+  /* Configure DMA Channel data length */
+  hdma->Instance->CNDTR = DataLength;
+  
+  /* Peripheral to Memory */
+  if((hdma->Init.Direction) == DMA_MEMORY_TO_PERIPH)
+  {
+    /* Configure DMA Channel destination address */
+    hdma->Instance->CPAR = DstAddress;
+    
+    /* Configure DMA Channel source address */
+    hdma->Instance->CMAR = SrcAddress;
+  }
+  /* Memory to Peripheral */
+  else
+  {
+    /* Configure DMA Channel source address */
+    hdma->Instance->CPAR = SrcAddress;
+    
+    /* Configure DMA Channel destination address */
+    hdma->Instance->CMAR = DstAddress;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_DMA_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5d6c1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash.c
@@ -0,0 +1,974 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_flash.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   FLASH HAL module driver.
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the internal FLASH memory:
+  *           + Program operations functions
+  *           + Memory Control functions 
+  *           + Peripheral State functions
+  *         
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### FLASH peripheral features #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..] The Flash memory interface manages CPU AHB I-Code and D-Code accesses 
+       to the Flash memory. It implements the erase and program Flash memory operations 
+       and the read and write protection mechanisms.
+
+  [..] The Flash memory interface accelerates code execution with a system of instruction
+      prefetch. 
+
+  [..] The FLASH main features are:
+      (+) Flash memory read operations
+      (+) Flash memory program/erase operations
+      (+) Read / write protections
+      (+) Prefetch on I-Code
+      (+) Option Bytes programming
+
+
+                     ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]                             
+      This driver provides functions and macros to configure and program the FLASH 
+      memory of all STM32F1xx devices.
+    
+      (#) FLASH Memory I/O Programming functions: this group includes all needed
+          functions to erase and program the main memory:
+        (++) Lock and Unlock the FLASH interface
+        (++) Erase function: Erase page, erase all pages
+        (++) Program functions: half word, word and doubleword
+    
+      (#) FLASH Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all needed
+          functions to manage the Option Bytes:
+        (++) Lock and Unlock the Option Bytes
+        (++) Set/Reset the write protection
+        (++) Set the Read protection Level
+        (++) Program the user Option Bytes
+        (++) Launch the Option Bytes loader
+        (++) Erase Option Bytes
+        (++) Program the data Option Bytes
+        (++) Get the Write protection.
+        (++) Get the user option bytes.
+    
+      (#) Interrupts and flags management functions : this group 
+          includes all needed functions to:
+        (++) Handle FLASH interrupts
+        (++) Wait for last FLASH operation according to its status
+        (++) Get error flag status           
+
+  [..] In addition to these function, this driver includes a set of macros allowing
+       to handle the following operations:
+      
+      (+) Set/Get the latency
+      (+) Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer
+      (+) Enable/Disable the half cycle access
+      (+) Enable/Disable the FLASH interrupts
+      (+) Monitor the FLASH flags status
+          
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH FLASH
+  * @brief FLASH HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Constants FLASH Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro ---------------------------- ---------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Macros FLASH Private Macros
+  * @{
+  */
+ 
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Variables FLASH Private Variables
+  * @{
+  */
+/* Variables used for Erase pages under interruption*/
+FLASH_ProcessTypeDef pFlash;
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Functions FLASH Private Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+static  void   FLASH_Program_HalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
+static  void   FLASH_SetErrorCode(void);
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions FLASH Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group1 Programming operation functions 
+  *  @brief   Programming operation functions 
+  *
+@verbatim   
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Program halfword, word or double word at a specified address
+  * @note   The function HAL_FLASH_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the FLASH interface
+  *         The function HAL_FLASH_Lock() should be called after to lock the FLASH interface
+  *
+  * @note   If an erase and a program operations are requested simultaneously,    
+  *         the erase operation is performed before the program one.
+  *  
+  * @note   FLASH should be previously erased before new programmation (only exception to this 
+  *         is when 0x0000 is programmed)
+  *
+  * @param  TypeProgram:  Indicate the way to program at a specified address.
+  *                       This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASH_Type_Program
+  * @param  Address:      Specifies the address to be programmed.
+  * @param  Data:         Specifies the data to be programmed
+  * 
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Program(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+  uint8_t index = 0;
+  uint8_t nbiterations = 0;
+  
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM(TypeProgram));
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(Address <= FLASH_BANK1_END)
+  {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+  }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  {
+    if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM_HALFWORD)
+    {
+      /* Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address. */
+      nbiterations = 1;
+    }
+    else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM_WORD)
+    {
+      /* Program word (32-bit = 2*16-bit) at a specified address. */
+      nbiterations = 2;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Program double word (64-bit = 4*16-bit) at a specified address. */
+      nbiterations = 4;
+    }
+
+    for (index = 0; index < nbiterations; index++)
+    {
+      FLASH_Program_HalfWord((Address + (2*index)), (uint16_t)(Data >> (16*index)));
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+      if(Address <= FLASH_BANK1_END)
+      {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+    
+        /* If the program operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PG);
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+        
+        /* If the program operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PG);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+      /* In case of error, stop programation procedure */
+      if (status != HAL_OK)
+      {
+        break;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Program halfword, word or double word at a specified address  with interrupt enabled.
+  * @note   The function HAL_FLASH_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the FLASH interface
+  *         The function HAL_FLASH_Lock() should be called after to lock the FLASH interface
+  *
+  * @note   If an erase and a program operations are requested simultaneously,    
+  *         the erase operation is performed before the program one.
+  *
+  * @param  TypeProgram: Indicate the way to program at a specified address.
+  *                      This parameter can be a value of @ref FLASH_Type_Program
+  * @param  Address:     Specifies the address to be programmed.
+  * @param  Data:        Specifies the data to be programmed
+  * 
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Program_IT(uint32_t TypeProgram, uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+  
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM(TypeProgram));
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  /* If procedure already ongoing, reject the next one */
+  if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  if(Address <= FLASH_BANK1_END)
+  {
+    /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+    __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP_BANK1 | FLASH_IT_ERR_BANK1);
+
+  }else
+  {
+    /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+    __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP_BANK2 | FLASH_IT_ERR_BANK2);
+  }
+#else
+  /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+  __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  
+  pFlash.Address = Address;
+  pFlash.Data = Data;
+
+  if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM_HALFWORD)
+  {
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMHALFWORD;
+    /*Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+    pFlash.DataRemaining = 1;
+  }
+  else if(TypeProgram == FLASH_TYPEPROGRAM_WORD)
+  {
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMWORD;
+    /*Program word (32-bit : 2*16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+    pFlash.DataRemaining = 2;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMDOUBLEWORD;
+    /*Program double word (64-bit : 4*16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+    pFlash.DataRemaining = 4;
+  }
+
+  /*Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+  FLASH_Program_HalfWord(Address, (uint16_t)Data);
+
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function handles FLASH interrupt request.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_FLASH_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+  uint32_t addresstmp = 0;
+  
+  /* Check FLASH operation error flags */
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR_BANK1) || __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR_BANK1) || \
+    (__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR_BANK2) || __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR_BANK2)))
+#else
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) ||__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR))
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  {
+    /*return the faulty address*/
+    addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+    /* Reset address */
+    pFlash.Address = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+  
+    /*Save the Error code*/
+    FLASH_SetErrorCode();
+    
+    /* FLASH error interrupt user callback */
+    HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback(addresstmp);
+
+    /* Stop the procedure ongoing*/
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+  }
+
+  /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag  */
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK1))
+  {
+    /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+    __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK1);
+#else
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP))
+  {
+    /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+    __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    
+    /* Process can continue only if no error detected */
+    if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+    {
+      if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE)
+      {
+        /* Nb of pages to erased can be decreased */
+        pFlash.DataRemaining--;
+
+        /* Check if there are still pages to erase*/
+        if(pFlash.DataRemaining != 0)
+        {
+          addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+          /*Indicate user which sector has been erased*/
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(addresstmp);
+
+          /*Increment sector number*/
+          addresstmp = pFlash.Address + FLASH_PAGE_SIZE;
+          pFlash.Address = addresstmp;
+
+          /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PER);
+
+          FLASH_PageErase(addresstmp);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /*No more pages to Erase, user callback can be called.*/
+          /*Reset Sector and stop Erase pages procedure*/
+          pFlash.Address = addresstmp = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(addresstmp);
+        }
+      }
+      else if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_MASSERASE)
+      {
+        /* Operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER);
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+        /* Stop Mass Erase procedure if no pending mass erase on other bank */
+        if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER))
+        {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+          /* MassErase ended. Return the selected bank*/
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(0);
+
+          /* Stop Mass Erase procedure*/
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+        }
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+      else
+      {
+        /* Nb of 16-bit data to program can be decreased */
+        pFlash.DataRemaining--;
+        
+        /* Check if there are still 16-bit data to program */
+        if(pFlash.DataRemaining != 0)
+        {
+          /* Increment address to 16-bit */
+          pFlash.Address += 2;
+          addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+          
+          /* Shift to have next 16-bit data */
+          pFlash.Data = (pFlash.Data >> 16);
+          
+          /* Operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PG);
+
+          /*Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+          FLASH_Program_HalfWord(addresstmp, (uint16_t)pFlash.Data);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /*Program ended. Return the selected address*/
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMHALFWORD)
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address);
+          }
+          else if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMWORD)
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address - 2);
+          }
+          else 
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address - 6);
+          }
+        
+          /* Reset Address and stop Program procedure*/
+          pFlash.Address = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag  */
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG( FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK2))
+  {
+    /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+    __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK2);
+    
+    /* Process can continue only if no error detected */
+    if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+    {
+      if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE)
+      {
+        /* Nb of pages to erased can be decreased */
+        pFlash.DataRemaining--;
+        
+        /* Check if there are still pages to erase*/
+        if(pFlash.DataRemaining != 0)
+        {
+          /* Indicate user which page address has been erased*/
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address);
+        
+          /* Increment page address to next page */
+          pFlash.Address += FLASH_PAGE_SIZE;
+          addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+
+          /* Operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PER);
+
+          FLASH_PageErase(addresstmp);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /*No more pages to Erase*/
+          
+          /*Reset Address and stop Erase pages procedure*/
+          pFlash.Address = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address);
+        }
+      }
+      else if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_MASSERASE)
+      {
+        /* Operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER);
+
+        if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER))
+        {
+          /* MassErase ended. Return the selected bank*/
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(0);
+        
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+        }
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* Nb of 16-bit data to program can be decreased */
+        pFlash.DataRemaining--;
+        
+        /* Check if there are still 16-bit data to program */
+        if(pFlash.DataRemaining != 0)
+        {
+          /* Increment address to 16-bit */
+          pFlash.Address += 2;
+          addresstmp = pFlash.Address;
+          
+          /* Shift to have next 16-bit data */
+          pFlash.Data = (pFlash.Data >> 16);
+          
+          /* Operation is completed, disable the PG Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PG);
+
+          /*Program halfword (16-bit) at a specified address.*/
+          FLASH_Program_HalfWord(addresstmp, (uint16_t)pFlash.Data);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /*Program ended. Return the selected address*/
+          /* FLASH EOP interrupt user callback */
+          if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMHALFWORD)
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address);
+          }
+          else if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_PROGRAMWORD)
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address-2);
+          }
+          else 
+          {
+            HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(pFlash.Address-6);
+          }
+          
+          /* Reset Address and stop Program procedure*/
+          pFlash.Address = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+          pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_NONE;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+#endif 
+
+  if(pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing == FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+  {
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+    /* Operation is completed, disable the PG, PER and MER Bits for both bank */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, (FLASH_CR_PG | FLASH_CR_PER | FLASH_CR_MER));
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, (FLASH_CR2_PG | FLASH_CR2_PER | FLASH_CR2_MER));  
+  
+    /* Disable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts for both banks */
+    __HAL_FLASH_DISABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP_BANK1 | FLASH_IT_ERR_BANK1 | FLASH_IT_EOP_BANK2 | FLASH_IT_ERR_BANK2);
+#else
+    /* Operation is completed, disable the PG, PER and MER Bits */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, (FLASH_CR_PG | FLASH_CR_PER | FLASH_CR_MER));
+
+    /* Disable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+    __HAL_FLASH_DISABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+    /* Process Unlocked */
+    __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+  }
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  FLASH end of operation interrupt callback
+  * @param  ReturnValue: The value saved in this parameter depends on the ongoing procedure
+  *                 - Mass Erase: No return value expected
+  *                 - Pages Erase: Address of the page which has been erased 
+  *                    (if 0xFFFFFFFF, it means that all the selected pages have been erased)
+  *                 - Program: Address which was selected for data program
+  * @retval none
+  */
+__weak void HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback(uint32_t ReturnValue)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(ReturnValue);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */ 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  FLASH operation error interrupt callback
+  * @param  ReturnValue: The value saved in this parameter depends on the ongoing procedure
+  *                 - Mass Erase: No return value expected
+  *                 - Pages Erase: Address of the page which returned an error
+  *                 - Program: Address which was selected for data program
+  * @retval none
+  */
+__weak void HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback(uint32_t ReturnValue)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(ReturnValue);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_FLASH_OperationErrorCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */ 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions 
+ *  @brief   management functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                      ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the FLASH 
+    memory operations.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Unlock the FLASH control register access
+  * @retval HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Unlock(void)
+{
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_LOCK))
+  {
+    /* Authorize the FLASH Registers access */
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->KEYR, FLASH_KEY1);
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->KEYR, FLASH_KEY2);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_LOCK))
+  {
+    /* Authorize the FLASH BANK2 Registers access */
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->KEYR2, FLASH_KEY1);
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->KEYR2, FLASH_KEY2);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  return HAL_OK; 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Locks the FLASH control register access
+  * @retval HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_Lock(void)
+{
+  /* Set the LOCK Bit to lock the FLASH Registers access */
+  SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_LOCK);
+  
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  /* Set the LOCK Bit to lock the FLASH BANK2 Registers access */
+  SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_LOCK);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+  return HAL_OK;  
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Unlock the FLASH Option Control Registers access.
+  * @retval HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock(void)
+{
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTWRE))
+  {
+    /* Authorizes the Option Byte register programming */
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->OPTKEYR, FLASH_OPTKEY1);
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->OPTKEYR, FLASH_OPTKEY2);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }  
+  
+  return HAL_OK;  
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Lock the FLASH Option Control Registers access.
+  * @retval HAL Status 
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
+{
+  /* Clear the OPTWRE Bit to lock the FLASH Option Byte Registers access */
+  CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTWRE);
+  
+  return HAL_OK;  
+}
+  
+/**
+  * @brief  Launch the option byte loading.
+  * @note   This function will reset automatically the MCU.
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch(void)
+{
+  /* Initiates a system reset request to launch the option byte loading */
+  HAL_NVIC_SystemReset();
+  
+  return HAL_OK;  
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */  
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral State functions 
+ *  @brief   Peripheral State functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                      ##### Peripheral State functions #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection permit to get in run-time the status of the FLASH peripheral.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Get the specific FLASH error flag.
+  * @retval FLASH_ErrorCode: The returned value can be:
+  *            @ref FLASH_Error_Codes
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_FLASH_GetError(void)
+{ 
+   return pFlash.ErrorCode;
+}  
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Program a half-word (16-bit) at a specified address.
+  * @param  Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+  * @param  Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void FLASH_Program_HalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
+{
+  /* Clean the error context */
+  pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+  
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(Address <= FLASH_BANK1_END)
+  {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    /* Proceed to program the new data */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PG);
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Proceed to program the new data */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PG);
+  }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+  /* Write data in the address */
+  *(__IO uint16_t*)Address = Data;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Wait for a FLASH operation to complete.
+  * @param  Timeout: maximum flash operation timeout
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+  /* Wait for the FLASH operation to complete by polling on BUSY flag to be reset.
+     Even if the FLASH operation fails, the BUSY flag will be reset and an error
+     flag will be set */
+     
+  uint32_t tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+     
+  while(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_BSY)) 
+  { 
+    if (Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+    {
+      if((Timeout == 0) || ((HAL_GetTick()-tickstart) > Timeout))
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag  */
+  if (__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP))
+  {
+    /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+    __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP);
+  }
+  
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR)  || 
+     __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR) || 
+     __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR))
+  {
+    /*Save the error code*/
+    FLASH_SetErrorCode();
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* If there is no error flag set */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+/**
+  * @brief  Wait for a FLASH BANK2 operation to complete.
+  * @param  Timeout: maximum flash operation timeout
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2(uint32_t Timeout)
+{ 
+  /* Wait for the FLASH BANK2 operation to complete by polling on BUSY flag to be reset.
+     Even if the FLASH BANK2 operation fails, the BUSY flag will be reset and an error
+     flag will be set */
+     
+  uint32_t tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+     
+  while(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_BSY_BANK2)) 
+  { 
+    if (Timeout != HAL_MAX_DELAY)
+    {
+      if((Timeout == 0) || ((HAL_GetTick()-tickstart) > Timeout))
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* Check FLASH End of Operation flag  */
+  if (__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK2))
+  {
+    /* Clear FLASH End of Operation pending bit */
+    __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_EOP_BANK2);
+  }
+
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR_BANK2) || __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR_BANK2))
+  {
+    /*Save the error code*/
+    FLASH_SetErrorCode();
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* If there is an error flag set */
+  return HAL_OK;
+  
+}
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Set the specific FLASH error flag.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void FLASH_SetErrorCode(void)
+{ 
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) || __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR_BANK2))
+#else
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR))
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  {
+    pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
+  }
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR) || __HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR_BANK2))
+#else
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_PGERR))
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+  {
+     pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_PROG;
+  }
+
+  if(__HAL_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR))
+  {
+     pFlash.ErrorCode |= HAL_FLASH_ERROR_OPTV;
+     __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_OPTVERR);
+  }
+
+  /* Clear FLASH error pending bits */
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR | FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR_BANK2 | FLASH_FLAG_PGERR | FLASH_FLAG_PGERR_BANK2);
+#else
+  __HAL_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR | FLASH_FLAG_PGERR);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+}  
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash_ex.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash_ex.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91e4d5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_flash_ex.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1140 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_flash_ex.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   Extended FLASH HAL module driver.
+  *    
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the FLASH peripheral:
+  *           + Extended Initialization/de-initialization functions
+  *           + Extended I/O operation functions
+  *           + Extended Peripheral Control functions 
+  *         
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+               ##### Flash peripheral extended features  #####
+  ==============================================================================
+           
+                      ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..] This driver provides functions to configure and program the FLASH memory 
+       of all STM32F1xxx devices. It includes
+       
+        (++) Set/Reset the write protection
+        (++) Program the user Option Bytes
+        (++) Get the Read protection Level
+  
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+#ifdef HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH
+  * @{
+  */
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Variables
+ * @{
+ */
+/* Variables used for Erase pages under interruption*/
+extern FLASH_ProcessTypeDef pFlash;
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+  
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx FLASHEx
+  * @brief FLASH HAL Extension module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Constants FLASHEx Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+#define FLASH_POSITION_IWDGSW_BIT        (uint32_t)POSITION_VAL(FLASH_OBR_IWDG_SW)
+#define FLASH_POSITION_OB_USERDATA0_BIT  (uint32_t)POSITION_VAL(FLASH_OBR_DATA0)
+#define FLASH_POSITION_OB_USERDATA1_BIT  (uint32_t)POSITION_VAL(FLASH_OBR_DATA1)
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Macros FLASHEx Private Macros
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */ 
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Private_Functions FLASHEx Private Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+/* Erase operations */
+static void              FLASH_MassErase(uint32_t Banks);
+
+/* Option bytes control */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_EnableWRP(uint32_t WriteProtectPage);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_DisableWRP(uint32_t WriteProtectPage);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_RDP_LevelConfig(uint8_t ReadProtectLevel);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t UserConfig);
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_ProgramData(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data);
+static uint32_t          FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void);
+static uint32_t          FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
+static uint8_t           FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions FLASHEx Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 FLASHEx Memory Erasing functions
+ *  @brief   FLASH Memory Erasing functions
+  *
+@verbatim   
+  ==============================================================================
+                ##### FLASH Erasing Programming functions ##### 
+  ==============================================================================
+
+    [..] The FLASH Memory Erasing functions, includes the following functions:
+    (+) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_Erase: return only when erase has been done
+    (+) @ref HAL_FLASHEx_Erase_IT: end of erase is done when @ref HAL_FLASH_EndOfOperationCallback 
+        is called with parameter 0xFFFFFFFF
+
+    [..] Any operation of erase should follow these steps:
+    (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the flash control register and 
+        program memory access.
+    (#) Call the desired function to erase page.
+    (#) Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash program memory access 
+       (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation).
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Perform a mass erase or erase the specified FLASH memory pages
+  * @note   To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+  *         must be called before.
+  *         Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access 
+  *         (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+  * @param[in]  pEraseInit pointer to an FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the erasing.
+  *
+  * @param[out]  PageError pointer to variable  that
+  *         contains the configuration information on faulty page in case of error
+  *         (0xFFFFFFFF means that all the pages have been correctly erased)
+  *
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_Erase(FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef *pEraseInit, uint32_t *PageError)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+  uint32_t address = 0;
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEERASE(pEraseInit->TypeErase));
+
+  if (pEraseInit->TypeErase == FLASH_TYPEERASE_MASSERASE)
+  {
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+    if (pEraseInit->Banks == FLASH_BANK_BOTH)
+    {
+      /* Mass Erase requested for Bank1 and Bank2 */
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      if ((FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK) && \
+          (FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK))
+      {
+        /*Mass erase to be done*/
+        FLASH_MassErase(FLASH_BANK_BOTH);
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        if ((FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK) && \
+            (FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK))
+        {
+          status = HAL_OK;
+        }
+        
+        /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER);
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER);
+      }
+    }
+    else if (pEraseInit->Banks == FLASH_BANK_2)
+    {
+      /* Mass Erase requested for Bank2 */
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      if (FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK)
+      {
+        /*Mass erase to be done*/
+        FLASH_MassErase(FLASH_BANK_2);
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+        
+        /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER);
+      }
+    }
+    else 
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    {
+      /* Mass Erase requested for Bank1 */
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      if (FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK)
+      {
+        /*Mass erase to be done*/
+        FLASH_MassErase(FLASH_BANK_1);
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+        
+        /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
+        CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Page Erase is requested */
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(pEraseInit->PageAddress));
+    assert_param(IS_FLASH_NB_PAGES(pEraseInit->PageAddress, pEraseInit->NbPages));
+    
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+    /* Page Erase requested on address located on bank2 */
+    if(pEraseInit->PageAddress > FLASH_BANK1_END)
+    {   
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      if (FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK)
+      {
+        /*Initialization of PageError variable*/
+        *PageError = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+        
+        /* Erase by page by page to be done*/
+        for(address = pEraseInit->PageAddress;
+            address < (pEraseInit->PageAddress + (pEraseInit->NbPages)*FLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+            address += FLASH_PAGE_SIZE)
+        {
+          FLASH_PageErase(address);
+          
+          /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+          status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperationBank2((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+          
+          /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PER);
+          
+          if (status != HAL_OK)
+          {
+            /* In case of error, stop erase procedure and return the faulty address */
+            *PageError = address;
+            break;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+   {
+      /* Page Erase requested on address located on bank1 */
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      if (FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE) == HAL_OK)
+      {
+        /*Initialization of PageError variable*/
+        *PageError = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+        
+        /* Erase page by page to be done*/
+        for(address = pEraseInit->PageAddress;
+            address < ((pEraseInit->NbPages * FLASH_PAGE_SIZE) + pEraseInit->PageAddress);
+            address += FLASH_PAGE_SIZE)
+        {
+          FLASH_PageErase(address);
+          
+          /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+          status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+          
+          /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the PER Bit */
+          CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PER);
+          
+          if (status != HAL_OK)
+          {
+            /* In case of error, stop erase procedure and return the faulty address */
+            *PageError = address;
+            break;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Perform a mass erase or erase the specified FLASH memory pages with interrupt enabled
+  * @note   To correctly run this function, the @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() function
+  *         must be called before.
+  *         Call the @ref HAL_FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access 
+  *         (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+  * @param  pEraseInit pointer to an FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the erasing.
+  *
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_Erase_IT(FLASH_EraseInitTypeDef *pEraseInit)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  /* If procedure already ongoing, reject the next one */
+  if (pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing != FLASH_PROC_NONE)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_TYPEERASE(pEraseInit->TypeErase));
+
+  /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+  __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP | FLASH_IT_ERR);
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  /* Enable End of FLASH Operation and Error source interrupts */
+  __HAL_FLASH_ENABLE_IT(FLASH_IT_EOP_BANK2 | FLASH_IT_ERR_BANK2);
+  
+#endif
+  if (pEraseInit->TypeErase == FLASH_TYPEERASE_MASSERASE)
+  {
+    /*Mass erase to be done*/
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_MASSERASE;
+        FLASH_MassErase(pEraseInit->Banks);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Erase by page to be done*/
+
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(pEraseInit->PageAddress));
+    assert_param(IS_FLASH_NB_PAGES(pEraseInit->PageAddress, pEraseInit->NbPages));
+
+    pFlash.ProcedureOnGoing = FLASH_PROC_PAGEERASE;
+    pFlash.DataRemaining = pEraseInit->NbPages;
+    pFlash.Address = pEraseInit->PageAddress;
+
+    /*Erase 1st page and wait for IT*/
+    FLASH_PageErase(pEraseInit->PageAddress);
+  }
+
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASHEx_Exported_Functions_Group2 Option Bytes Programming functions
+ *  @brief   Option Bytes Programming functions
+  *
+@verbatim   
+  ==============================================================================
+                ##### Option Bytes Programming functions ##### 
+  ==============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the FLASH 
+    option bytes operations.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Erases the FLASH option bytes.
+  * @note   This functions erases all option bytes except the Read protection (RDP).
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the FLASH interface
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the options bytes
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch() should be called after to force the reload of the options bytes
+  *         (system reset will occur)
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_OBErase(void)
+{
+  uint8_t rdptmp = OB_RDP_LEVEL_0;
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+  /* Get the actual read protection Option Byte value */
+  rdptmp = FLASH_OB_GetRDP();
+
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  {
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+    /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the option bytes */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_STRT);
+
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+    /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTER);
+
+    if(status == HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Restore the last read protection Option Byte value */
+      status = FLASH_OB_RDP_LevelConfig(rdptmp);
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Return the erase status */
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Program option bytes
+  * @note   The function @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the FLASH interface
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the options bytes
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch() should be called after to force the reload of the options bytes
+  *         (system reset will occur)
+  *
+  * @param  pOBInit pointer to an FLASH_OBInitStruct structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the programming.
+  *
+  * @retval HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL Status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_FLASHEx_OBProgram(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OPTIONBYTE(pOBInit->OptionType));
+
+  /* Write protection configuration */
+  if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_WRP) == OPTIONBYTE_WRP)
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_WRPSTATE(pOBInit->WRPState));
+    if (pOBInit->WRPState == OB_WRPSTATE_ENABLE)
+    {
+      /* Enable of Write protection on the selected page */
+      status = FLASH_OB_EnableWRP(pOBInit->WRPPage);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Disable of Write protection on the selected page */
+      status = FLASH_OB_DisableWRP(pOBInit->WRPPage);
+    }
+    if (status != HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+      return status;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Read protection configuration */
+  if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_RDP) == OPTIONBYTE_RDP)
+  {
+    status = FLASH_OB_RDP_LevelConfig(pOBInit->RDPLevel);
+    if (status != HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+      return status;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* USER configuration */
+  if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_USER) == OPTIONBYTE_USER)
+  {
+    status = FLASH_OB_UserConfig(pOBInit->USERConfig);
+    if (status != HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+      return status;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* DATA configuration*/
+  if((pOBInit->OptionType & OPTIONBYTE_DATA) == OPTIONBYTE_DATA)
+  {
+    status = FLASH_OB_ProgramData(pOBInit->DATAAddress, pOBInit->DATAData);
+    if (status != HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Process Unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+      return status;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(&pFlash);
+
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Get the Option byte configuration
+  * @param  pOBInit pointer to an FLASH_OBInitStruct structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the programming.
+  *
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_FLASHEx_OBGetConfig(FLASH_OBProgramInitTypeDef *pOBInit)
+{
+  pOBInit->OptionType = OPTIONBYTE_WRP | OPTIONBYTE_RDP | OPTIONBYTE_USER;
+
+  /*Get WRP*/
+  pOBInit->WRPPage = FLASH_OB_GetWRP();
+
+  /*Get RDP Level*/
+  pOBInit->RDPLevel = FLASH_OB_GetRDP();
+
+  /*Get USER*/
+  pOBInit->USERConfig = FLASH_OB_GetUser();
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Get the Option byte user data
+  * @param  DATAAdress Address of the option byte DATA
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref OB_DATA_ADDRESS_DATA0
+  *            @arg @ref OB_DATA_ADDRESS_DATA1
+  * @retval Value programmed in USER data
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_FLASHEx_OBGetUserData(uint32_t DATAAdress)
+{
+  uint32_t value = 0;
+  
+  if (DATAAdress == OB_DATA_ADDRESS_DATA0)
+  {
+    /* Get value programmed in OB USER Data0 */
+    value = READ_BIT(FLASH->OBR, FLASH_OBR_DATA0) >> FLASH_POSITION_OB_USERDATA0_BIT;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Get value programmed in OB USER Data1 */
+    value = READ_BIT(FLASH->OBR, FLASH_OBR_DATA1) >> FLASH_POSITION_OB_USERDATA1_BIT;
+  }
+  
+  return value;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASHEx_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Full erase of FLASH memory Bank 
+  * @param  Banks Banks to be erased
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref FLASH_BANK_1 Bank1 to be erased
+  @if STM32F101xG
+  *            @arg @ref FLASH_BANK_2 Bank2 to be erased
+  *            @arg @ref FLASH_BANK_BOTH Bank1 and Bank2 to be erased
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F103xG
+  *            @arg @ref FLASH_BANK_2 Bank2 to be erased
+  *            @arg @ref FLASH_BANK_BOTH Bank1 and Bank2 to be erased
+  @endif
+  *
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void FLASH_MassErase(uint32_t Banks)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_BANK(Banks));
+
+  /* Clean the error context */
+  pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(Banks == FLASH_BANK_BOTH)
+  {
+    /* bank1 & bank2 will be erased*/
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_STRT);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_STRT);
+  }
+  else if(Banks == FLASH_BANK_2)
+  {
+    /*Only bank2 will be erased*/
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_MER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_STRT);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    /* Only bank1 will be erased*/
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_MER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_STRT);
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable the write protection of the desired pages
+  * @note   An option byte erase is done automatically in this function. 
+  * @note   When the memory read protection level is selected (RDP level = 1), 
+  *         it is not possible to program or erase the flash page i if
+  *         debug features are connected or boot code is executed in RAM, even if nWRPi = 1 
+  * 
+  * @param  WriteProtectPage specifies the page(s) to be write protected.
+  *         The value of this parameter depend on device used within the same series 
+  * @retval HAL status 
+  */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_EnableWRP(uint32_t WriteProtectPage)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+  uint16_t WRP0_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP1_WRP1)
+  uint16_t WRP1_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP1_WRP1 */
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP2_WRP2)
+  uint16_t WRP2_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP2_WRP2 */
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP3_WRP3)
+  uint16_t WRP3_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP3_WRP3 */
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WriteProtectPage));
+    
+  /* Get current write protected pages and the new pages to be protected ******/
+  WriteProtectPage = (uint32_t)(~((~FLASH_OB_GetWRP()) | WriteProtectPage));
+  
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES0TO15MASK)
+  WRP0_Data = (uint16_t)(WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES0TO15MASK);
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK)
+  WRP0_Data = (uint16_t)(WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK */
+  
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES16TO31MASK)
+  WRP1_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES16TO31MASK) >> 8);
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK)
+  WRP1_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK) >> 8);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK */
+ 
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK)
+  WRP2_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK) >> 16);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK */
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK)
+  WRP2_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK) >> 16);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK */
+
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO255MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO255MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO511MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO511MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO127MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO127MASK) >> 24); 
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK */
+  
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  { 
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+    /* To be able to write again option byte, need to perform a option byte erase */
+    status = HAL_FLASHEx_OBErase();
+    if (status == HAL_OK)  
+    {
+      /* Enable write protection */
+      SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP0_WRP0)
+      if(WRP0_Data != 0xFF)
+      {
+        OB->WRP0 &= WRP0_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP0_WRP0 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP1_WRP1)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP1_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP1 &= WRP1_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP1_WRP1 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP2_WRP2)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP2_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP2 &= WRP2_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP2_WRP2 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP3_WRP3)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP3_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP3 &= WRP3_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP3_WRP3 */
+
+      /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+      CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+    }
+  }
+  
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable the write protection of the desired pages
+  * @note   An option byte erase is done automatically in this function. 
+  * @note   When the memory read protection level is selected (RDP level = 1), 
+  *         it is not possible to program or erase the flash page i if   
+  *         debug features are connected or boot code is executed in RAM, even if nWRPi = 1 
+  * 
+  * @param  WriteProtectPage specifies the page(s) to be write unprotected.
+  *         The value of this parameter depend on device used within the same series 
+  * @retval HAL status 
+  */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_DisableWRP(uint32_t WriteProtectPage)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+  uint16_t WRP0_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP1_WRP1)
+  uint16_t WRP1_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP1_WRP1 */
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP2_WRP2)
+  uint16_t WRP2_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP2_WRP2 */
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP3_WRP3)
+  uint16_t WRP3_Data = 0xFFFF;
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP3_WRP3 */
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(WriteProtectPage));
+
+  /* Get current write protected pages and the new pages to be unprotected ******/
+  WriteProtectPage = (FLASH_OB_GetWRP() | WriteProtectPage);
+
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES0TO15MASK)
+  WRP0_Data = (uint16_t)(WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES0TO15MASK);
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK)
+  WRP0_Data = (uint16_t)(WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES0TO31MASK */
+  
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES16TO31MASK)
+  WRP1_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES16TO31MASK) >> 8);
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK)
+  WRP1_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK) >> 8);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES32TO63MASK */
+ 
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK)
+  WRP2_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK) >> 16);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES64TO95MASK */
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK)
+  WRP2_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK) >> 16);
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES32TO47MASK */
+
+#if defined(OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO255MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO255MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO511MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO511MASK) >> 24); 
+#elif defined(OB_WRP_PAGES48TO127MASK)
+  WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((WriteProtectPage & OB_WRP_PAGES48TO127MASK) >> 24); 
+#endif /* OB_WRP_PAGES96TO127MASK */
+
+    
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  { 
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+    /* To be able to write again option byte, need to perform a option byte erase */
+    status = HAL_FLASHEx_OBErase();
+    if (status == HAL_OK)  
+    {
+      SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP0_WRP0)
+      if(WRP0_Data != 0xFF)
+      {
+        OB->WRP0 |= WRP0_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP0_WRP0 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP1_WRP1)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP1_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP1 |= WRP1_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP1_WRP1 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP2_WRP2)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP2_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP2 |= WRP2_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP2_WRP2 */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_WRP3_WRP3)
+      if((status == HAL_OK) && (WRP3_Data != 0xFF))
+      {
+        OB->WRP3 |= WRP3_Data;
+        
+        /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+        status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+      }
+#endif /* FLASH_WRP3_WRP3 */
+
+      /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+      CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+    }
+  }
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Set the read protection level.
+  * @param  ReadProtectLevel specifies the read protection level.
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_0 No protection
+  *            @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_1 Read protection of the memory
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_RDP_LevelConfig(uint8_t ReadProtectLevel)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OB_RDP_LEVEL(ReadProtectLevel));
+  
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+  
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  { 
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+    
+    /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the option bytes */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTER);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_STRT);
+
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+    /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTER);
+
+    if(status == HAL_OK)
+    {
+      /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+      SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+      
+      WRITE_REG(OB->RDP, ReadProtectLevel);
+      
+      /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+      status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE); 
+      
+      /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+      CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+    }
+  }
+  
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Program the FLASH User Option Byte.    
+  * @note   Programming of the OB should be performed only after an erase (otherwise PGERR occurs)
+  * @param  UserConfig The FLASH User Option Bytes values FLASH_OBR_IWDG_SW(Bit2), 
+  *         FLASH_OBR_nRST_STOP(Bit3),FLASH_OBR_nRST_STDBY(Bit4).
+  *         And BFBF2(Bit5) for STM32F101xG and STM32F103xG . 
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t UserConfig)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_OK;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE((UserConfig&OB_IWDG_SW)));
+  assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE((UserConfig&OB_STOP_NO_RST)));
+  assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE((UserConfig&OB_STDBY_NO_RST)));
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT1((UserConfig&OB_BOOT1_SET)));
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+  
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  {     
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+    /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG); 
+ 
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+    OB->USER = (UserConfig | 0xF0);
+#else
+    OB->USER = (UserConfig | 0x88);
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+
+    /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+  }
+  
+  return status; 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Programs a half word at a specified Option Byte Data address.
+  * @note   The function @ref HAL_FLASH_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the FLASH interface
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Unlock() should be called before to unlock the options bytes
+  *         The function @ref HAL_FLASH_OB_Launch() should be called after to force the reload of the options bytes 
+  *         (system reset will occur)
+  *         Programming of the OB should be performed only after an erase (otherwise PGERR occurs)
+  * @param  Address specifies the address to be programmed.
+  *         This parameter can be 0x1FFFF804 or 0x1FFFF806. 
+  * @param  Data specifies the data to be programmed.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+static HAL_StatusTypeDef FLASH_OB_ProgramData(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
+{
+  HAL_StatusTypeDef status = HAL_ERROR;
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_OB_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+  
+  /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+  status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+  
+  if(status == HAL_OK)
+  {
+    /* Clean the error context */
+    pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+    /* Enables the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG); 
+    *(__IO uint16_t*)Address = Data;
+    
+    /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+    status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation((uint32_t)FLASH_TIMEOUT_VALUE);
+    
+    /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+    CLEAR_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_OPTPG);
+  }
+  /* Return the Option Byte Data Program Status */
+  return status;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value.
+  * @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value
+  */
+static uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void)
+{
+  /* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */
+  return (uint32_t)(READ_REG(FLASH->WRPR));
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the FLASH Read Protection level.
+  * @retval FLASH ReadOut Protection Status:
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_0 No protection
+  *            @arg @ref OB_RDP_LEVEL_1 Read protection of the memory
+  */
+static uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void)
+{
+  uint32_t readstatus = OB_RDP_LEVEL_0;
+  uint32_t tmp_reg = 0;
+  
+  /* Read RDP level bits */
+  tmp_reg = READ_BIT(FLASH->OBR, FLASH_OBR_RDPRT);
+
+  if (tmp_reg == FLASH_OBR_RDPRT)
+  {
+    readstatus = OB_RDP_LEVEL_1;
+  }
+  else 
+  {
+    readstatus = OB_RDP_LEVEL_0;
+  }
+
+  return readstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the FLASH User Option Byte value.
+  * @retval The FLASH User Option Bytes values: FLASH_OBR_IWDG_SW(Bit2), 
+  *         FLASH_OBR_nRST_STOP(Bit3),FLASH_OBR_nRST_STDBY(Bit4).
+  *         And FLASH_OBR_BFB2(Bit5) for STM32F101xG and STM32F103xG . 
+  */
+static uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void)
+{
+  /* Return the User Option Byte */
+  return (uint8_t)((READ_REG(FLASH->OBR) & FLASH_OBR_USER) >> FLASH_POSITION_IWDGSW_BIT);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup FLASH_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Erase the specified FLASH memory page
+  * @param  PageAddress FLASH page to erase
+  *         The value of this parameter depend on device used within the same series      
+  * 
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void FLASH_PageErase(uint32_t PageAddress)
+{
+  /* Clean the error context */
+  pFlash.ErrorCode = HAL_FLASH_ERROR_NONE;
+
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  if(PageAddress > FLASH_BANK1_END)
+  { 
+    /* Proceed to erase the page */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_PER);
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->AR2, PageAddress);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR2, FLASH_CR2_STRT);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+    /* Proceed to erase the page */
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_PER);
+    WRITE_REG(FLASH->AR, PageAddress);
+    SET_BIT(FLASH->CR, FLASH_CR_STRT);
+#if defined(FLASH_BANK2_END)
+  }
+#endif /* FLASH_BANK2_END */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_FLASH_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e048ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,597 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_gpio.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   GPIO HAL module driver.
+  *         This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) peripheral:
+  *           + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+  *           + IO operation functions
+  *         
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                    ##### GPIO Peripheral features #####
+  ==============================================================================         
+  [..] 
+  Subject to the specific hardware characteristics of each I/O port listed in the datasheet, each
+  port bit of the General Purpose IO (GPIO) Ports, can be individually configured by software
+  in several modes:
+  (+) Input mode 
+  (+) Analog mode
+  (+) Output mode
+  (+) Alternate function mode
+  (+) External interrupt/event lines
+
+  [..]  
+  During and just after reset, the alternate functions and external interrupt  
+  lines are not active and the I/O ports are configured in input floating mode.
+  
+  [..]   
+  All GPIO pins have weak internal pull-up and pull-down resistors, which can be 
+  activated or not.
+
+  [..]
+  In Output or Alternate mode, each IO can be configured on open-drain or push-pull
+  type and the IO speed can be selected depending on the VDD value.
+
+  [..]  
+  All ports have external interrupt/event capability. To use external interrupt 
+  lines, the port must be configured in input mode. All available GPIO pins are 
+  connected to the 16 external interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15.
+  
+  [..]  
+  The external interrupt/event controller consists of up to 20 edge detectors in connectivity
+  line devices, or 19 edge detectors in other devices for generating event/interrupt requests.
+  Each input line can be independently configured to select the type (event or interrupt) and
+  the corresponding trigger event (rising or falling or both). Each line can also masked
+  independently. A pending register maintains the status line of the interrupt requests
+ 
+                     ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================  
+ [..]             
+   (#) Enable the GPIO APB2 clock using the following function : __HAL_RCC_GPIOx_CLK_ENABLE(). 
+   
+   (#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using HAL_GPIO_Init().
+       (++) Configure the IO mode using "Mode" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
+       (++) Activate Pull-up, Pull-down resistor using "Pull" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef 
+            structure.
+       (++) In case of Output or alternate function mode selection: the speed is 
+            configured through "Speed" member from GPIO_InitTypeDef structure
+       (++) Analog mode is required when a pin is to be used as ADC channel 
+            or DAC output.
+       (++) In case of external interrupt/event selection the "Mode" member from 
+            GPIO_InitTypeDef structure select the type (interrupt or event) and 
+            the corresponding trigger event (rising or falling or both).
+   
+   (#) In case of external interrupt/event mode selection, configure NVIC IRQ priority 
+       mapped to the EXTI line using HAL_NVIC_SetPriority() and enable it using
+       HAL_NVIC_EnableIRQ().
+         
+   (#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use HAL_GPIO_ReadPin().
+            
+   (#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use 
+       HAL_GPIO_WritePin()/HAL_GPIO_TogglePin().
+  
+   (#) To lock pin configuration until next reset use HAL_GPIO_LockPin().
+                 
+   (#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not 
+       active and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG
+       pins).
+  
+   (#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as general purpose 
+       (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE oscillator is off. The LSE has 
+       priority over the GPIO function.
+  
+   (#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as 
+       general purpose PD0 and PD1, respectively, when the HSE oscillator is off. 
+       The HSE has priority over the GPIO function.
+  
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+  */ 
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO GPIO
+  * @brief GPIO HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Private_Constants GPIO Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+#define GPIO_MODE             ((uint32_t)0x00000003)
+#define EXTI_MODE             ((uint32_t)0x10000000)
+#define GPIO_MODE_IT          ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
+#define GPIO_MODE_EVT         ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
+#define RISING_EDGE           ((uint32_t)0x00100000) 
+#define FALLING_EDGE          ((uint32_t)0x00200000) 
+#define GPIO_OUTPUT_TYPE      ((uint32_t)0x00000010) 
+#define GPIO_NUMBER           ((uint32_t)16)
+
+/* Definitions for bit manipulation of CRL and CRH register */
+#define  GPIO_CR_MODE_INPUT         ((uint32_t)0x00000000) /*!< 00: Input mode (reset state)  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_ANALOG         ((uint32_t)0x00000000) /*!< 00: Analog mode  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_INPUT_FLOATING ((uint32_t)0x00000004) /*!< 01: Floating input (reset state)  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_INPUT_PU_PD    ((uint32_t)0x00000008) /*!< 10: Input with pull-up / pull-down  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_GP_OUTPUT_PP   ((uint32_t)0x00000000) /*!< 00: General purpose output push-pull  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_GP_OUTPUT_OD   ((uint32_t)0x00000004) /*!< 01: General purpose output Open-drain  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_AF_OUTPUT_PP   ((uint32_t)0x00000008) /*!< 10: Alternate function output Push-pull  */
+#define  GPIO_CR_CNF_AF_OUTPUT_OD   ((uint32_t)0x0000000C) /*!< 11: Alternate function output Open-drain  */
+ 
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Exported_Functions GPIO Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and deinitialization functions
+ *  @brief    Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim    
+ ===============================================================================
+              ##### Initialization and deinitialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to initialize and de-initialize the GPIOs
+    to be ready for use.
+ 
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified parameters in the GPIO_Init.
+  * @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral
+  * @param  GPIO_Init: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+  *         the configuration information for the specified GPIO peripheral.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef  *GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef *GPIO_Init)
+{
+  uint32_t position;
+  uint32_t ioposition = 0x00;
+  uint32_t iocurrent = 0x00;
+  uint32_t temp = 0x00;
+  uint32_t config = 0x00;
+  __IO uint32_t *configregister; /* Store the address of CRL or CRH register based on pin number */
+  uint32_t registeroffset = 0; /* offset used during computation of CNF and MODE bits placement inside CRL or CRH register */
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Init->Pin));
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_Init->Mode));
+
+  /* Configure the port pins */
+  for (position = 0; position < GPIO_NUMBER; position++)
+  {
+    /* Get the IO position */
+    ioposition = ((uint32_t)0x01) << position;
+    
+    /* Get the current IO position */
+    iocurrent = (uint32_t)(GPIO_Init->Pin) & ioposition;
+
+    if (iocurrent == ioposition)
+    {
+      /* Check the Alternate function parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+
+      /* Based on the required mode, filling config variable with MODEy[1:0] and CNFy[3:2] corresponding bits */
+      switch (GPIO_Init->Mode)
+      {
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in OUTPUT push-pull mode */
+        case GPIO_MODE_OUTPUT_PP:
+          /* Check the GPIO speed parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_Init->Speed));
+          config = GPIO_Init->Speed + GPIO_CR_CNF_GP_OUTPUT_PP;
+          break;
+          
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in OUTPUT open-drain mode */
+        case GPIO_MODE_OUTPUT_OD:
+          /* Check the GPIO speed parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_Init->Speed));
+          config = GPIO_Init->Speed + GPIO_CR_CNF_GP_OUTPUT_OD;
+          break;
+          
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in ALTERNATE FUNCTION push-pull mode */
+        case GPIO_MODE_AF_PP:
+          /* Check the GPIO speed parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_Init->Speed));
+          config = GPIO_Init->Speed + GPIO_CR_CNF_AF_OUTPUT_PP;
+          break;
+          
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in ALTERNATE FUNCTION open-drain mode */
+        case GPIO_MODE_AF_OD:
+          /* Check the GPIO speed parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_Init->Speed));
+          config = GPIO_Init->Speed + GPIO_CR_CNF_AF_OUTPUT_OD;
+          break;
+          
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in INPUT (also applicable to EVENT and IT mode) */
+        case GPIO_MODE_INPUT:
+        case GPIO_MODE_IT_RISING:
+        case GPIO_MODE_IT_FALLING:
+        case GPIO_MODE_IT_RISING_FALLING:
+        case GPIO_MODE_EVT_RISING:
+        case GPIO_MODE_EVT_FALLING:
+        case GPIO_MODE_EVT_RISING_FALLING:
+          /* Check the GPIO pull parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_GPIO_PULL(GPIO_Init->Pull));
+          if(GPIO_Init->Pull == GPIO_NOPULL)
+          {  
+            config = GPIO_CR_MODE_INPUT + GPIO_CR_CNF_INPUT_FLOATING;
+          }
+          else if(GPIO_Init->Pull == GPIO_PULLUP)
+          {
+            config = GPIO_CR_MODE_INPUT + GPIO_CR_CNF_INPUT_PU_PD;
+            
+            /* Set the corresponding ODR bit */
+            GPIOx->BSRR = ioposition;
+          }
+          else /* GPIO_PULLDOWN */
+          {
+            config = GPIO_CR_MODE_INPUT + GPIO_CR_CNF_INPUT_PU_PD;
+            
+            /* Reset the corresponding ODR bit */
+            GPIOx->BRR = ioposition;
+          }
+          break; 
+          
+        /* If we are configuring the pin in INPUT analog mode */
+        case GPIO_MODE_ANALOG:
+            config = GPIO_CR_MODE_INPUT + GPIO_CR_CNF_ANALOG;
+          break;
+        
+        /* Parameters are checked with assert_param */
+        default:
+          break;
+      }
+      
+      /* Check if the current bit belongs to first half or last half of the pin count number
+       in order to address CRH or CRL register*/
+      configregister = (iocurrent < GPIO_PIN_8) ? &GPIOx->CRL     : &GPIOx->CRH;
+      registeroffset = (iocurrent < GPIO_PIN_8) ? (position << 2) : ((position - 8) << 2);
+      
+      /* Apply the new configuration of the pin to the register */
+      MODIFY_REG((*configregister), ((GPIO_CRL_MODE0 | GPIO_CRL_CNF0) << registeroffset ), (config << registeroffset));
+      
+      /*--------------------- EXTI Mode Configuration ------------------------*/
+      /* Configure the External Interrupt or event for the current IO */
+      if((GPIO_Init->Mode & EXTI_MODE) == EXTI_MODE) 
+      {
+        /* Enable AFIO Clock */
+        __HAL_RCC_AFIO_CLK_ENABLE();
+        temp = AFIO->EXTICR[position >> 2];
+        CLEAR_BIT(temp, ((uint32_t)0x0F) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+        SET_BIT(temp, (GPIO_GET_INDEX(GPIOx)) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+        AFIO->EXTICR[position >> 2] = temp;
+        
+
+        /* Configure the interrupt mask */
+        if((GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_MODE_IT) == GPIO_MODE_IT)
+        {
+          SET_BIT(EXTI->IMR, iocurrent); 
+        } 
+        else
+        {
+          CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->IMR, iocurrent); 
+        } 
+        
+        /* Configure the event mask */
+        if((GPIO_Init->Mode & GPIO_MODE_EVT) == GPIO_MODE_EVT)
+        {
+          SET_BIT(EXTI->EMR, iocurrent); 
+        } 
+        else
+        {
+          CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->EMR, iocurrent); 
+        }
+        
+        /* Enable or disable the rising trigger */
+        if((GPIO_Init->Mode & RISING_EDGE) == RISING_EDGE)
+        {
+          SET_BIT(EXTI->RTSR, iocurrent); 
+        } 
+        else
+        {
+          CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->RTSR, iocurrent); 
+        }
+        
+        /* Enable or disable the falling trigger */
+        if((GPIO_Init->Mode & FALLING_EDGE) == FALLING_EDGE)
+        {
+          SET_BIT(EXTI->FTSR, iocurrent); 
+        } 
+        else
+        {
+          CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->FTSR, iocurrent); 
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  De-initializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+  * @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral
+  * @param  GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+  *         This parameter can be one of GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef  *GPIOx, uint32_t GPIO_Pin)
+{ 
+  uint32_t position = 0x00;
+  uint32_t iocurrent = 0x00;
+  uint32_t tmp = 0x00;
+  __IO uint32_t *configregister; /* Store the address of CRL or CRH register based on pin number */
+  uint32_t registeroffset = 0;
+ 
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+  /* Configure the port pins */
+  while ((GPIO_Pin >> position) != 0)
+  {
+    /* Get current io position */
+    iocurrent = (GPIO_Pin) & ((uint32_t)1 << position);
+
+    if (iocurrent)
+    {
+      /*------------------------- GPIO Mode Configuration --------------------*/
+      /* Check if the current bit belongs to first half or last half of the pin count number
+       in order to address CRH or CRL register */
+      configregister = (iocurrent < GPIO_PIN_8) ? &GPIOx->CRL     : &GPIOx->CRH;
+      registeroffset = (iocurrent < GPIO_PIN_8) ? (position << 2) : ((position - 8) << 2);
+      
+      /* CRL/CRH default value is floating input(0x04) shifted to correct position */
+      MODIFY_REG(*configregister, ((GPIO_CRL_MODE0 | GPIO_CRL_CNF0) << registeroffset ), GPIO_CRL_CNF0_0 << registeroffset);
+      
+      /* ODR default value is 0 */
+      CLEAR_BIT(GPIOx->ODR, iocurrent);
+      
+      /*------------------------- EXTI Mode Configuration --------------------*/
+      /* Clear the External Interrupt or Event for the current IO */
+      
+      tmp = AFIO->EXTICR[position >> 2];
+      tmp &= (((uint32_t)0x0F) << (4 * (position & 0x03)));
+      if(tmp == (GPIO_GET_INDEX(GPIOx) << (4 * (position & 0x03))))
+      {
+        tmp = ((uint32_t)0x0F) << (4 * (position & 0x03));
+        CLEAR_BIT(AFIO->EXTICR[position >> 2], tmp);
+          
+        /* Clear EXTI line configuration */
+        CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->IMR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+        CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->EMR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+        
+        /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */
+        CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->RTSR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+        CLEAR_BIT(EXTI->FTSR, (uint32_t)iocurrent);
+      }
+    }
+    
+    position++;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Exported_Functions_Group2 IO operation functions 
+ *  @brief   GPIO Read and Write 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                       ##### IO operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the GPIOs.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Reads the specified input port pin.
+  * @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral
+  * @param  GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
+  *         This parameter can be GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+  * @retval The input port pin value.
+  */
+GPIO_PinState HAL_GPIO_ReadPin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+  GPIO_PinState bitstatus;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+  if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)GPIO_PIN_RESET)
+  {
+    bitstatus = GPIO_PIN_SET;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    bitstatus = GPIO_PIN_RESET;
+  }
+  return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
+  * 
+  * @note   This function uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify 
+  *         accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between
+  *         the read and the modify access.
+  *               
+  * @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral
+  * @param  GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+  *          This parameter can be one of GPIO_PIN_x where x can be (0..15).
+  * @param  PinState: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the GPIO_PinState enum values:
+  *            @arg GPIO_BIT_RESET: to clear the port pin
+  *            @arg GPIO_BIT_SET: to set the port pin
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIO_WritePin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, GPIO_PinState PinState)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_ACTION(PinState));
+
+  if(PinState != GPIO_PIN_RESET)
+  {
+    GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    GPIOx->BSRR = (uint32_t)GPIO_Pin << 16;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Toggles the specified GPIO pin
+  * @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral 
+  * @param  GPIO_Pin: Specifies the pins to be toggled.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIO_TogglePin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+  GPIOx->ODR ^= GPIO_Pin;
+}
+
+/**
+* @brief  Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers.
+* @note   The locking mechanism allows the IO configuration to be frozen. When the LOCK sequence
+*         has been applied on a port bit, it is no longer possible to modify the value of the port bit until
+*         the next reset.
+* @param  GPIOx: where x can be (A..G depending on device used) to select the GPIO peripheral
+* @param  GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be locked.
+*         This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+* @retval None
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_GPIO_LockPin(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+  __IO uint32_t tmp = GPIO_LCKR_LCKK;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_LOCK_INSTANCE(GPIOx));
+  assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+  /* Apply lock key write sequence */
+  SET_BIT(tmp, GPIO_Pin);
+  /* Set LCKx bit(s): LCKK='1' + LCK[15-0] */
+  GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+  /* Reset LCKx bit(s): LCKK='0' + LCK[15-0] */
+  GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin;
+  /* Set LCKx bit(s): LCKK='1' + LCK[15-0] */
+  GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+  /* Read LCKK bit*/
+  tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+
+  if((uint32_t)(GPIOx->LCKR & GPIO_LCKR_LCKK))
+  {
+    return HAL_OK;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function handles EXTI interrupt request.
+  * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the pins connected EXTI line
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIO_EXTI_IRQHandler(uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+  /* EXTI line interrupt detected */
+  if(__HAL_GPIO_EXTI_GET_IT(GPIO_Pin) != RESET) 
+  { 
+    __HAL_GPIO_EXTI_CLEAR_IT(GPIO_Pin);
+    HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback(GPIO_Pin);
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  EXTI line detection callback
+  * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the pins connected EXTI line
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback(uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(GPIO_Pin);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_GPIO_EXTI_Callback could be implemented in the user file
+   */ 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio_ex.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio_ex.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31493e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_gpio_ex.c
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_gpio_ex.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   GPIO Extension HAL module driver.
+  *         This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) extension peripheral.
+  *           + Extended features functions
+  *         
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                    ##### GPIO Peripheral extension features #####
+  ==============================================================================         
+  [..] GPIO module on STM32F1 family, manage also the AFIO register:
+       (+) Possibility to use the EVENTOUT Cortex feature
+   
+                     ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..] This driver provides functions to use EVENTOUT Cortex feature
+    (#) Configure EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the function HAL_GPIOEx_ConfigEventout()
+    (#) Activate EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the HAL_GPIOEx_EnableEventout()
+    (#) Deactivate EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the HAL_GPIOEx_DisableEventout()
+ 
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+  */ 
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIOEx GPIOEx
+  * @brief GPIO HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @defgroup GPIOEx_Exported_Functions GPIOEx Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIOEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 Extended features functions
+ *  @brief    Extended features functions 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+  ==============================================================================
+                 ##### Extended features functions #####
+  ==============================================================================  
+    [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Configure EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the function HAL_GPIOEx_ConfigEventout()
+    (+) Activate EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the HAL_GPIOEx_EnableEventout()
+    (+) Deactivate EVENTOUT Cortex feature using the HAL_GPIOEx_DisableEventout()
+                     
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the port and pin on which the EVENTOUT Cortex signal will be connected.
+  * @param  GPIO_PortSource Select the port used to output the Cortex EVENTOUT signal.
+  *   This parameter can be a value of @ref GPIOEx_EVENTOUT_PORT.
+  * @param  GPIO_PinSource Select the pin used to output the Cortex EVENTOUT signal.
+  *   This parameter can be a value of @ref GPIOEx_EVENTOUT_PIN.
+  * @retval None
+  */  
+void HAL_GPIOEx_ConfigEventout(uint32_t GPIO_PortSource, uint32_t GPIO_PinSource)
+{
+  /* Verify the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_AFIO_EVENTOUT_PORT(GPIO_PortSource));
+  assert_param(IS_AFIO_EVENTOUT_PIN(GPIO_PinSource));
+  
+  /* Apply the new configuration */
+  MODIFY_REG(AFIO->EVCR, (AFIO_EVCR_PORT)|(AFIO_EVCR_PIN), (GPIO_PortSource)|(GPIO_PinSource));
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables the Event Output.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIOEx_EnableEventout(void)
+{
+  SET_BIT(AFIO->EVCR, AFIO_EVCR_EVOE);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disables the Event Output.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_GPIOEx_DisableEventout(void)
+{
+  CLEAR_BIT(AFIO->EVCR, AFIO_EVCR_EVOE);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+  
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+  
+#endif /* HAL_GPIO_MODULE_ENABLED */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_iwdg.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_iwdg.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23e0791
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_iwdg.c
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_iwdg.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   IWDG HAL module driver.
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the Independent Watchdog (IWDG) peripheral:
+  *           + Initialization and Configuration functions
+  *           + IO operation functions
+  *           + Peripheral State functions
+  @verbatim 
+================================================================================
+                    ##### IWDG specific features #####
+================================================================================
+    [..] 
+    (+) The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable
+        through option byte).
+    (+) The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated Low-Speed clock (LSI) and
+        thus stays active even if the main clock fails.
+    (+) Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled
+        (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from 
+        the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000)
+        a system reset is generated.
+    (+) The IWDG counter should be refreshed at regular intervals, otherwise the
+        watchdog generates an MCU reset when the counter reaches 0.          
+    (+) The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional
+        in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY).
+    (+) IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when an IWDG
+        reset occurs.
+
+    (+) Min-max timeout value at 40KHz (LSI): 0.1us / 26.2s .
+        The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F1xx
+        devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock
+        connected internally to TIM5 CH4 input capture). The measured value
+        can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy.
+        For more information, please refer to the STM32F1xx Reference manual.
+        Note: LSI Calibration is only available on: High density, XL-density and Connectivity line devices.
+
+                     ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+    (+) Use IWDG using HAL_IWDG_Init() function to :
+        (++) Enable write access to IWDG_PR, IWDG_RLR.   
+        (++) Configure the IWDG prescaler, counter reload value.
+             This reload value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter
+             is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value.
+    (+) Use IWDG using HAL_IWDG_Start() function to :
+        (++) Reload IWDG counter with value defined in the IWDG_RLR register.
+        (++) Start the IWDG, when the IWDG is used in software mode (no need 
+             to enable the LSI, it will be enabled by hardware).
+    (+) Then the application program must refresh the IWDG counter at regular
+        intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
+        HAL_IWDG_Refresh() function.    
+    
+     *** IWDG HAL driver macros list ***
+     ====================================
+     [..]
+       Below the list of most used macros in IWDG HAL driver.
+       
+      (+) __HAL_IWDG_START: Enable the IWDG peripheral
+      (+) __HAL_IWDG_RELOAD_COUNTER: Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register    
+      (+) __HAL_IWDG_GET_FLAG: Get the selected IWDG's flag status
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */ 
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG IWDG
+  * @brief IWDG HAL module driver.
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_IWDG_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Private_Constants IWDG Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#define IWDG_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT (uint32_t)1000
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Exported_Functions IWDG Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions 
+ *  @brief    Initialization and Configuration functions. 
+ *
+@verbatim    
+ ===============================================================================
+          ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+    [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Initialize the IWDG according to the specified parameters 
+          in the IWDG_InitTypeDef and create the associated handle
+      (+) Initialize the IWDG MSP
+      (+) DeInitialize IWDG MSP 
+ 
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the IWDG according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the IWDG_InitTypeDef and creates the associated handle.
+  * @param  hiwdg: pointer to a IWDG_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for the specified IWDG module.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_IWDG_Init(IWDG_HandleTypeDef *hiwdg)
+{
+  /* Check the IWDG handle allocation */
+  if(hiwdg == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_IWDG_ALL_INSTANCE(hiwdg->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(hiwdg->Init.Prescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(hiwdg->Init.Reload)); 
+  
+  /* Check pending flag, if previous update not done, return error */
+  if((__HAL_IWDG_GET_FLAG(hiwdg, IWDG_FLAG_PVU) != RESET)
+     &&(__HAL_IWDG_GET_FLAG(hiwdg, IWDG_FLAG_RVU) != RESET))
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+    
+  if(hiwdg->State == HAL_IWDG_STATE_RESET)
+  {  
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    hiwdg->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware */
+    HAL_IWDG_MspInit(hiwdg);
+  }
+  
+  /* Change IWDG peripheral state */
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_BUSY;  
+  
+  /* Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers */  
+  IWDG_ENABLE_WRITE_ACCESS(hiwdg);
+  
+  /* Write to IWDG registers the IWDG_Prescaler & IWDG_Reload values to work with */
+  MODIFY_REG(hiwdg->Instance->PR, IWDG_PR_PR, hiwdg->Init.Prescaler);
+  MODIFY_REG(hiwdg->Instance->RLR, IWDG_RLR_RL, hiwdg->Init.Reload);
+ 
+  /* Change IWDG peripheral state */
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_READY;
+  
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the IWDG MSP.
+  * @param  hiwdg: pointer to a IWDG_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for the specified IWDG module.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_IWDG_MspInit(IWDG_HandleTypeDef *hiwdg)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(hiwdg);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_IWDG_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Exported_Functions_Group2 IO operation functions  
+ *  @brief   IO operation functions  
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                      ##### IO operation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]  This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Start the IWDG.
+      (+) Refresh the IWDG.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the IWDG.
+  * @param  hiwdg: pointer to a IWDG_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for the specified IWDG module.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_IWDG_Start(IWDG_HandleTypeDef *hiwdg)
+{
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(hiwdg); 
+  
+    /* Change IWDG peripheral state */  
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Start the IWDG peripheral */
+  __HAL_IWDG_START(hiwdg);
+  
+    /* Reload IWDG counter with value defined in the RLR register */
+  __HAL_IWDG_RELOAD_COUNTER(hiwdg);
+  
+  /* Change IWDG peripheral state */    
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_READY; 
+  
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(hiwdg);
+  
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Refreshes the IWDG.
+  * @param  hiwdg: pointer to a IWDG_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for the specified IWDG module.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_IWDG_Refresh(IWDG_HandleTypeDef *hiwdg)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(hiwdg);
+
+    /* Change IWDG peripheral state */
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+  /* Wait until RVU flag is RESET */
+  while(__HAL_IWDG_GET_FLAG(hiwdg, IWDG_FLAG_RVU) != RESET)
+  {
+    if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > IWDG_DEFAULT_TIMEOUT)
+    {
+      /* Set IWDG state */
+      hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_TIMEOUT;
+
+       /* Process unlocked */
+      __HAL_UNLOCK(hiwdg);
+
+      return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+    }
+  }
+  
+  /* Reload IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register */
+  __HAL_IWDG_RELOAD_COUNTER(hiwdg);
+    
+  /* Change IWDG peripheral state */    
+  hiwdg->State = HAL_IWDG_STATE_READY; 
+  
+  /* Process Unlocked */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(hiwdg);
+  
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Exported_Functions_Group3 Peripheral State functions 
+ *  @brief    Peripheral State functions. 
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                      ##### Peripheral State functions #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection permits to get in run-time the status of the peripheral 
+    and the data flow.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the IWDG state.
+  * @param  hiwdg: pointer to a IWDG_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for the specified IWDG module.
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_IWDG_StateTypeDef HAL_IWDG_GetState(IWDG_HandleTypeDef *hiwdg)
+{
+  return hiwdg->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_IWDG_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_pwr.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_pwr.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e178e42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_pwr.c
@@ -0,0 +1,636 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_pwr.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   PWR HAL module driver.
+  *
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+  *          functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral:
+  *           + Initialization/de-initialization functions
+  *           + Peripheral Control functions 
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR PWR
+  * @brief    PWR HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Private_Constants PWR Private Constants
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/** @defgroup PWR_PVD_Mode_Mask PWR PVD Mode Mask
+  * @{
+  */ 
+#define PVD_MODE_IT               ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
+#define PVD_MODE_EVT              ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
+#define PVD_RISING_EDGE           ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
+#define PVD_FALLING_EDGE          ((uint32_t)0x00000002)
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_register_alias_address PWR Register alias address
+  * @{
+  */ 
+/* ------------- PWR registers bit address in the alias region ---------------*/
+#define PWR_OFFSET               (PWR_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
+#define PWR_CR_OFFSET            0x00
+#define PWR_CSR_OFFSET           0x04
+#define PWR_CR_OFFSET_BB         (PWR_OFFSET + PWR_CR_OFFSET)
+#define PWR_CSR_OFFSET_BB        (PWR_OFFSET + PWR_CSR_OFFSET)
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+   
+/** @defgroup PWR_CR_register_alias PWR CR Register alias address
+  * @{
+  */  
+/* --- CR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of LPSDSR bit */
+#define LPSDSR_BIT_NUMBER        POSITION_VAL(PWR_CR_LPDS)
+#define CR_LPSDSR_BB             ((uint32_t)(PERIPH_BB_BASE + (PWR_CR_OFFSET_BB * 32) + (LPSDSR_BIT_NUMBER * 4)))
+
+/* Alias word address of DBP bit */
+#define DBP_BIT_NUMBER            POSITION_VAL(PWR_CR_DBP)
+#define CR_DBP_BB                ((uint32_t)(PERIPH_BB_BASE + (PWR_CR_OFFSET_BB * 32) + (DBP_BIT_NUMBER * 4)))
+
+/* Alias word address of PVDE bit */
+#define PVDE_BIT_NUMBER           POSITION_VAL(PWR_CR_PVDE)
+#define CR_PVDE_BB               ((uint32_t)(PERIPH_BB_BASE + (PWR_CR_OFFSET_BB * 32) + (PVDE_BIT_NUMBER * 4)))
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_CSR_register_alias PWR CSR Register alias address
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/* --- CSR Register ---*/
+/* Alias word address of EWUP1 bit */
+#define CSR_EWUP_BB(VAL)         ((uint32_t)(PERIPH_BB_BASE + (PWR_CSR_OFFSET_BB * 32) + (POSITION_VAL(VAL) * 4)))
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+  
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup PWR_Private_Functions PWR Private Functions
+ * brief   WFE cortex command overloaded for HAL_PWR_EnterSTOPMode usage only (see Workaround section)
+ * @{
+ */
+static void PWR_OverloadWfe(void);
+
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+__NOINLINE
+static void PWR_OverloadWfe(void)
+{
+  __asm volatile( "wfe" );
+  __asm volatile( "nop" );
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions PWR Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions 
+  *  @brief   Initialization and de-initialization functions
+  *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+              ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+    [..]
+      After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
+      registers) is protected against possible unwanted
+      write accesses.
+      To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
+        (+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
+            __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE() macro.
+        (+) Enable access to RTC domain using the HAL_PWR_EnableBkUpAccess() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset values.  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DeInit(void)
+{
+  __HAL_RCC_PWR_FORCE_RESET();
+  __HAL_RCC_PWR_RELEASE_RESET();
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables access to the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC
+  *         backup data registers ).
+  * @note   If the HSE divided by 128 is used as the RTC clock, the
+  *         Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableBkUpAccess(void)
+{
+  /* Enable access to RTC and backup registers */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disables access to the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC
+  *         backup data registers).
+  * @note   If the HSE divided by 128 is used as the RTC clock, the
+  *         Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableBkUpAccess(void)
+{
+  /* Disable access to RTC and backup registers */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_DBP_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions 
+  * @brief    Low Power modes configuration functions
+  *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+                 ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+     
+    *** PVD configuration ***
+    =========================
+    [..]
+      (+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a
+          threshold selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
+
+      (+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower
+          than the PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI
+          line16 and can generate an interrupt if enabled. This is done through
+          __HAL_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_IT() macro.
+      (+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
+
+    *** WakeUp pin configuration ***
+    ================================
+    [..]
+      (+) WakeUp pin is used to wake up the system from Standby mode. This pin is
+          forced in input pull-down configuration and is active on rising edges.
+      (+) There is one WakeUp pin:
+          WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00.
+
+    [..]
+
+    *** Low Power modes configuration ***
+    =====================================
+     [..]
+      The device features 3 low-power modes:
+      (+) Sleep mode: CPU clock off, all peripherals including Cortex-M3 core peripherals like 
+                      NVIC, SysTick, etc. are kept running
+      (+) Stop mode: All clocks are stopped
+      (+) Standby mode: 1.8V domain powered off
+  
+  
+   *** Sleep mode ***
+   ==================
+    [..]
+      (+) Entry:
+          The Sleep mode is entered by using the HAL_PWR_EnterSLEEPMode(PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON, PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx)
+              functions with
+          (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+          (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+     
+      (+) Exit:
+        (++) WFI entry mode, Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt
+             controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
+        (++) WFE entry mode, Any wakeup event can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
+           (+++) Any peripheral interrupt w/o NVIC configuration & SEVONPEND bit set in the Cortex (HAL_PWR_EnableSEVOnPend)
+           (+++) Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Event mode
+
+   *** Stop mode ***
+   =================
+    [..]
+      The Stop mode is based on the Cortex-M3 deepsleep mode combined with peripheral
+      clock gating. The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.
+      In Stop mode, all clocks in the 1.8 V domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI and the HSE RC 
+      oscillators are disabled. SRAM and register contents are preserved.
+      In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+
+      (+) Entry:
+           The Stop mode is entered using the HAL_PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_REGULATOR_VALUE, PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx )
+             function with:
+          (++) PWR_REGULATOR_VALUE= PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON: Main regulator ON.
+          (++) PWR_REGULATOR_VALUE= PWR_LOWPOWERREGULATOR_ON: Low Power regulator ON.
+          (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx= PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction
+          (++) PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFx= PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction
+      (+) Exit:
+          (++) WFI entry mode, Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt mode with NVIC configured
+          (++) WFE entry mode, Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Event mode.
+
+   *** Standby mode ***
+   ====================
+     [..]
+      The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based on the
+      Cortex-M3 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled. The 1.8 V domain is 
+      consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI oscillator and the HSE oscillator are also 
+      switched off. SRAM and register contents are lost except for registers in the Backup domain 
+      and Standby circuitry
+      
+      (+) Entry:
+        (++) The Standby mode is entered using the HAL_PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
+      (+) Exit:
+        (++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm event rising edge, external Reset in 
+             NRSTpin, IWDG Reset
+
+   *** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode ***
+       =============================================
+       [..]
+        
+       (+) The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, 
+           without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).
+   
+       (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop and Standby modes
+
+           (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to 
+                configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the HAL_RTC_SetAlarm_IT() function.
+
+   *** PWR Workarounds linked to Silicon Limitation ***
+       ====================================================
+       [..]
+       Below the list of all silicon limitations known on STM32F1xx prouct.
+
+       (#)Workarounds Implemented inside PWR HAL Driver
+          (##)Debugging Stop mode with WFE entry - overloaded the WFE by an internal function    
+        
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+  * @param  sConfigPVD: pointer to an PWR_PVDTypeDef structure that contains the configuration
+  *         information for the PVD.
+  * @note   Refer to the electrical characteristics of your device datasheet for
+  *         more details about the voltage threshold corresponding to each
+  *         detection level.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_ConfigPVD(PWR_PVDTypeDef *sConfigPVD)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(sConfigPVD->PVDLevel));
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_MODE(sConfigPVD->Mode));
+
+  /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PVDLevel value */
+  MODIFY_REG(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_PLS, sConfigPVD->PVDLevel);
+  
+  /* Clear any previous config. Keep it clear if no event or IT mode is selected */
+  __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_EVENT();
+  __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_IT();
+  __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_FALLING_EDGE(); 
+  __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_DISABLE_RISING_EDGE();
+
+  /* Configure interrupt mode */
+  if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_MODE_IT) == PVD_MODE_IT)
+  {
+    __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_IT();
+  }
+  
+  /* Configure event mode */
+  if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_MODE_EVT) == PVD_MODE_EVT)
+  {
+    __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_EVENT();
+  }
+  
+  /* Configure the edge */
+  if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_RISING_EDGE) == PVD_RISING_EDGE)
+  {
+    __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_RISING_EDGE();
+  }
+  
+  if((sConfigPVD->Mode & PVD_FALLING_EDGE) == PVD_FALLING_EDGE)
+  {
+    __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_ENABLE_FALLING_EDGE();
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnablePVD(void)
+{
+  /* Enable the power voltage detector */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DisablePVD(void)
+{
+  /* Disable the power voltage detector */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CR_PVDE_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Enables the WakeUp PINx functionality.
+  * @param WakeUpPinx: Specifies the Power Wake-Up pin to enable.
+  *        This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *           @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN1
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableWakeUpPin(uint32_t WakeUpPinx)
+{
+  /* Check the parameter */
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(WakeUpPinx));
+  /* Enable the EWUPx pin */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_EWUP_BB(WakeUpPinx) = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Disables the WakeUp PINx functionality.
+  * @param WakeUpPinx: Specifies the Power Wake-Up pin to disable.
+  *        This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *           @arg PWR_WAKEUP_PIN1
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableWakeUpPin(uint32_t WakeUpPinx)
+{
+  /* Check the parameter */
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(WakeUpPinx));
+  /* Disable the EWUPx pin */
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) CSR_EWUP_BB(WakeUpPinx) = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Enters Sleep mode.
+  * @note  In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+  * @param Regulator: Regulator state as no effect in SLEEP mode -  allows to support portability from legacy software
+  * @param SLEEPEntry: Specifies if SLEEP mode is entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+  *           When WFI entry is used, tick interrupt have to be disabled if not desired as 
+  *           the interrupt wake up source.
+  *           This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+  *            @arg PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSLEEPMode(uint32_t Regulator, uint8_t SLEEPEntry)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  /* No check on Regulator because parameter not used in SLEEP mode */
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_SLEEP_ENTRY(SLEEPEntry));
+
+  /* Clear SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+  /* Select SLEEP mode entry -------------------------------------------------*/
+  if(SLEEPEntry == PWR_SLEEPENTRY_WFI)
+  {
+    /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+    __WFI();
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Request Wait For Event */
+    __SEV();
+    __WFE();
+    __WFE();
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Enters Stop mode. 
+  * @note  In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+  * @note  When exiting Stop mode by using an interrupt or a wakeup event,
+  *        HSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock.
+  * @note  When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional
+  *         startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode. 
+  *         By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption
+  *         is higher although the startup time is reduced.    
+  * @param Regulator: Specifies the regulator state in Stop mode.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg PWR_MAINREGULATOR_ON: Stop mode with regulator ON
+  *            @arg PWR_LOWPOWERREGULATOR_ON: Stop mode with low power regulator ON
+  * @param STOPEntry: Specifies if Stop mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg PWR_STOPENTRY_WFI: Enter Stop mode with WFI instruction
+  *            @arg PWR_STOPENTRY_WFE: Enter Stop mode with WFE instruction   
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSTOPMode(uint32_t Regulator, uint8_t STOPEntry)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(Regulator));
+  assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(STOPEntry));
+
+  /* Clear PDDS bit in PWR register to specify entering in STOP mode when CPU enter in Deepsleep */ 
+  CLEAR_BIT(PWR->CR,  PWR_CR_PDDS);
+
+  /* Select the voltage regulator mode by setting LPDS bit in PWR register according to Regulator parameter value */
+  MODIFY_REG(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_LPDS, Regulator);
+
+  /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+  /* Select Stop mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/
+  if(STOPEntry == PWR_STOPENTRY_WFI)
+  {
+    /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+    __WFI();
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Request Wait For Event */
+    __SEV();
+    PWR_OverloadWfe(); /* WFE redefine locally */
+    PWR_OverloadWfe(); /* WFE redefine locally */
+  }
+  /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief Enters Standby mode.
+  * @note  In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for:
+  *          - Reset pad (still available) 
+  *          - TAMPER pin if configured for tamper or calibration out.
+  *          - WKUP pin (PA0) if enabled.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void)
+{
+  /* Select Standby mode */
+  SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_PDDS);
+
+  /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk));
+
+  /* This option is used to ensure that store operations are completed */
+#if defined ( __CC_ARM)
+  __force_stores();
+#endif
+  /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+  __WFI();
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief Indicates Sleep-On-Exit when returning from Handler mode to Thread mode. 
+  * @note Set SLEEPONEXIT bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, the processor 
+  *       re-enters SLEEP mode when an interruption handling is over.
+  *       Setting this bit is useful when the processor is expected to run only on
+  *       interruptions handling.         
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableSleepOnExit(void)
+{
+  /* Set SLEEPONEXIT bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPONEXIT_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief Disables Sleep-On-Exit feature when returning from Handler mode to Thread mode. 
+  * @note Clears SLEEPONEXIT bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, the processor 
+  *       re-enters SLEEP mode when an interruption handling is over.          
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableSleepOnExit(void)
+{
+  /* Clear SLEEPONEXIT bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPONEXIT_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief Enables CORTEX M3 SEVONPEND bit. 
+  * @note Sets SEVONPEND bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, this causes 
+  *       WFE to wake up when an interrupt moves from inactive to pended.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_EnableSEVOnPend(void)
+{
+  /* Set SEVONPEND bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  SET_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SEVONPEND_Msk));
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief Disables CORTEX M3 SEVONPEND bit. 
+  * @note Clears SEVONPEND bit of SCR register. When this bit is set, this causes 
+  *       WFE to wake up when an interrupt moves from inactive to pended.         
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_DisableSEVOnPend(void)
+{
+  /* Clear SEVONPEND bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+  CLEAR_BIT(SCB->SCR, ((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SEVONPEND_Msk));
+}
+
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  This function handles the PWR PVD interrupt request.
+  * @note   This API should be called under the PVD_IRQHandler().
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_PWR_PVD_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+  /* Check PWR exti flag */
+  if(__HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_GET_FLAG() != RESET)
+  {
+    /* PWR PVD interrupt user callback */
+    HAL_PWR_PVDCallback();
+
+    /* Clear PWR Exti pending bit */
+    __HAL_PWR_PVD_EXTI_CLEAR_FLAG();
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  PWR PVD interrupt callback
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_PWR_PVDCallback(void)
+{
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_PWR_PVDCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */ 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_PWR_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a862695
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1270 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_rcc.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   RCC HAL module driver.
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the Reset and Clock Control (RCC) peripheral:
+  *           + Initialization and de-initialization functions
+  *           + Peripheral Control functions
+  *       
+  @verbatim                
+  ==============================================================================
+                      ##### RCC specific features #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]  
+      After reset the device is running from Internal High Speed oscillator
+      (HSI 8MHz) with Flash 0 wait state, Flash prefetch buffer is enabled, 
+      and all peripherals are off except internal SRAM, Flash and JTAG.
+      (+) There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) buses;
+          all peripherals mapped on these buses are running at HSI speed.
+      (+) The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
+      (+) All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the JTAG pins which
+          are assigned to be used for debug purpose.
+    [..] Once the device started from reset, the user application has to:
+      (+) Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock
+          (if the application needs higher frequency/performance)
+      (+) Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings  
+      (+) Configure the AHB and APB buses prescalers
+      (+) Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used
+      (+) Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals whose clocks are not
+          derived from the System clock (I2S, RTC, ADC, USB OTG FS) 
+
+                      ##### RCC Limitations #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]  
+      A delay between an RCC peripheral clock enable and the effective peripheral 
+      enabling should be taken into account in order to manage the peripheral read/write 
+      from/to registers.
+      (+) This delay depends on the peripheral mapping.
+        (++) AHB & APB peripherals, 1 dummy read is necessary
+
+    [..]  
+      Workarounds:
+      (#) For AHB & APB peripherals, a dummy read to the peripheral register has been
+          inserted in each __HAL_RCC_PPP_CLK_ENABLE() macro.
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+*/
+  
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC RCC
+* @brief RCC HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Constants RCC Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/* Bits position in  in the CFGR register */
+#define RCC_CFGR_HPRE_BITNUMBER           POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_HPRE)
+#define RCC_CFGR_PPRE1_BITNUMBER          POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PPRE1)
+#define RCC_CFGR_PPRE2_BITNUMBER          POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PPRE2)
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Macros RCC Private Macros
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#define MCO1_CLK_ENABLE()     __HAL_RCC_GPIOA_CLK_ENABLE()
+#define MCO1_GPIO_PORT        GPIOA
+#define MCO1_PIN              GPIO_PIN_8
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Variables RCC Private Variables
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions RCC Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions_Group1 Initialization and de-initialization functions 
+  *  @brief    Initialization and Configuration functions 
+  *
+  @verbatim    
+  ===============================================================================
+           ##### Initialization and de-initialization functions #####
+  ===============================================================================
+    [..]
+      This section provides functions allowing to configure the internal/external oscillators
+      (HSE, HSI, LSE, LSI, PLL, CSS and MCO) and the System buses clocks (SYSCLK, AHB, APB1
+      and APB2).
+
+    [..] Internal/external clock and PLL configuration
+      (#) HSI (high-speed internal), 8 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly or through
+          the PLL as System clock source.
+      (#) LSI (low-speed internal), ~40 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
+          clock source.
+
+      (#) HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 24 MHz (STM32F100xx) or 4 to 16 MHz (STM32F101x/STM32F102x/STM32F103x) or 3 to 25 MHz (STM32F105x/STM32F107x)  crystal oscillator used directly or
+          through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
+
+      (#) LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source.   
+
+      (#) PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), featuring different output clocks:
+        (++) The first output is used to generate the high speed system clock (up to 72 MHz for STM32F10xxx or up to 24 MHz for STM32F100xx)
+        (++) The second output is used to generate the clock for the USB OTG FS (48 MHz)
+
+      (#) CSS (Clock security system), once enable using the macro __HAL_RCC_CSS_ENABLE()
+          and if a HSE clock failure occurs(HSE used directly or through PLL as System 
+          clock source), the System clocks automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt
+          is generated if enabled. The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M3 NMI 
+          (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.   
+
+      (#) MCO1 (microcontroller clock output), used to output SYSCLK, HSI,  
+          HSE or PLL clock (divided by 2) on PA8 pin + PLL2CLK, PLL3CLK/2, PLL3CLK and XTI for STM32F105x/STM32F107x
+
+    [..] System, AHB and APB buses clocks configuration
+      (#) Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI,
+          HSE and PLL.
+          The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable
+          prescaler and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped
+          on AHB bus (DMA, GPIO...). APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived
+          from AHB clock through configurable prescalers and used to clock
+          the peripherals mapped on these buses. You can use
+          "@ref HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks.
+
+      -@- All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:
+          (+@) RTC: RTC clock can be derived either from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock
+              divided by 128. 
+          (+@) USB OTG FS and RTC: USB OTG FS require a frequency equal to 48 MHz
+              to work correctly. This clock is derived of the main PLL through PLL Multiplier.
+          (+@) I2S interface on STM32F105x/STM32F107x can be derived from PLL3CLK
+          (+@) IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
+
+      (#) For STM32F10xxx, the maximum frequency of the SYSCLK and HCLK/PCLK2 is 72 MHz, PCLK1 36 MHz.
+          For STM32F100xx, the maximum frequency of the SYSCLK and HCLK/PCLK1/PCLK2 is 24 MHz.  
+          Depending on the SYSCLK frequency, the flash latency should be adapted accordingly.
+  @endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+  
+/*
+  Additional consideration on the SYSCLK based on Latency settings:
+        +-----------------------------------------------+
+        | Latency       | SYSCLK clock frequency (MHz)  |
+        |---------------|-------------------------------|
+        |0WS(1CPU cycle)|       0 < SYSCLK <= 24        |
+        |---------------|-------------------------------|
+        |1WS(2CPU cycle)|      24 < SYSCLK <= 48        |
+        |---------------|-------------------------------|
+        |2WS(3CPU cycle)|      48 < SYSCLK <= 72        |
+        +-----------------------------------------------+
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state.
+  * @note   The default reset state of the clock configuration is given below:
+  *            - HSI ON and used as system clock source
+  *            - HSE and PLL OFF
+  *            - AHB, APB1 and APB2 prescaler set to 1.
+  *            - CSS and MCO1 OFF
+  *            - All interrupts disabled
+  * @note   This function does not modify the configuration of the
+  *            - Peripheral clocks
+  *            - LSI, LSE and RTC clocks
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_DeInit(void)
+{
+  /* Switch SYSCLK to HSI */
+  CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_SW);
+
+  /* Reset HSEON, CSSON, & PLLON bits */
+  CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSEON | RCC_CR_CSSON | RCC_CR_PLLON);
+  
+  /* Reset HSEBYP bit */
+  CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSEBYP);
+  
+  /* Reset CFGR register */
+  CLEAR_REG(RCC->CFGR);
+  
+  /* Set HSITRIM bits to the reset value */
+  MODIFY_REG(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSITRIM, ((uint32_t)0x10 << POSITION_VAL(RCC_CR_HSITRIM)));
+  
+#if (defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC) || defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE))
+  /* Reset CFGR2 register */
+  CLEAR_REG(RCC->CFGR2);
+
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC || STM32F100xB || STM32F100xE */
+  /* Disable all interrupts */
+  CLEAR_REG(RCC->CIR);
+
+  /* Update the SystemCoreClock global variable */
+  SystemCoreClock = HSI_VALUE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the RCC Oscillators according to the specified parameters in the
+  *         RCC_OscInitTypeDef.
+  * @param  RCC_OscInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the RCC Oscillators.
+  * @note   The PLL is not disabled when used as system clock.
+  * @note   The PLL is not disabled when USB OTG FS clock is enabled (specific to devices with USB FS)
+  * @note   Transitions LSE Bypass to LSE On and LSE On to LSE Bypass are not
+  *         supported by this macro. User should request a transition to LSE Off
+  *         first and then LSE On or LSE Bypass.
+  * @note   Transition HSE Bypass to HSE On and HSE On to HSE Bypass are not
+  *         supported by this macro. User should request a transition to HSE Off
+  *         first and then HSE On or HSE Bypass.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCC_OscConfig(RCC_OscInitTypeDef  *RCC_OscInitStruct)
+{
+   uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(RCC_OscInitStruct != NULL);
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE(RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType));
+  
+  /*------------------------------- HSE Configuration ------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState));
+        
+    /* When the HSE is used as system clock or clock source for PLL in these cases it is not allowed to be disabled */
+    if((__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE) 
+       || ((__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && (__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE)))
+    {
+      if((__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET) && (RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState == RCC_HSE_OFF))
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Set the new HSE configuration ---------------------------------------*/
+      __HAL_RCC_HSE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState);
+      
+
+       /* Check the HSE State */
+      if(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState != RCC_HSE_OFF)
+      {
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till HSE is ready */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) == RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till HSE is disabled */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET)
+        {
+           if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  /*----------------------------- HSI Configuration --------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_HSI(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState));
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_CALIBRATION_VALUE(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue));
+    
+    /* Check if HSI is used as system clock or as PLL source when PLL is selected as system clock */ 
+    if((__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI) 
+       || ((__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && (__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI_DIV2)))
+    {
+      /* When HSI is used as system clock it will not disabled */
+      if((__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) != RESET) && (RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState != RCC_HSI_ON))
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+      /* Otherwise, just the calibration is allowed */
+      else
+      {
+        /* Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.*/
+        __HAL_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue);
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Check the HSI State */
+      if(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState != RCC_HSI_OFF)
+      {
+       /* Enable the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). */
+        __HAL_RCC_HSI_ENABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till HSI is ready */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) == RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+                
+        /* Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.*/
+        __HAL_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATIONVALUE_ADJUST(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue);
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* Disable the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI). */
+        __HAL_RCC_HSI_DISABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till HSI is disabled */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) != RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > HSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  /*------------------------------ LSI Configuration -------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_LSI(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState));
+    
+    /* Check the LSI State */
+    if(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState != RCC_LSI_OFF)
+    {
+      /* Enable the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). */
+      __HAL_RCC_LSI_ENABLE();
+      
+      /* Get Start Tick */
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+      /* Wait till LSI is ready */  
+      while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY) == RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > LSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+      /*  To have a fully stabilized clock in the specified range, a software delay of 1ms 
+          should be added.*/
+      HAL_Delay(1);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Disable the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI). */
+      __HAL_RCC_LSI_DISABLE();
+      
+      /* Get Start Tick */
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+      /* Wait till LSI is disabled */  
+      while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY) != RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > LSI_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  /*------------------------------ LSE Configuration -------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType) & RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE) == RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState));
+
+    /* Enable Power Clock*/
+      __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE();
+    
+      /* Enable write access to Backup domain */
+      SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP);
+      
+      /* Wait for Backup domain Write protection disable */
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+
+    while((PWR->CR & PWR_CR_DBP) == RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > RCC_DBP_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+
+    /* Set the new LSE configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+    __HAL_RCC_LSE_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState);
+    /* Check the LSE State */
+    if(RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState != RCC_LSE_OFF)
+    {
+      /* Get Start Tick */
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+      /* Wait till LSE is ready */  
+      while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) == RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Get Start Tick */
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+      /* Wait till LSE is disabled */  
+      while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) != RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+#if defined(RCC_CR_PLL2ON)
+  /*-------------------------------- PLL2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL2(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2State));
+  if ((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2State) != RCC_PLL2_NONE)
+  {
+    /* This bit can not be cleared if the PLL2 clock is used indirectly as system 
+      clock (i.e. it is used as PLL clock entry that is used as system clock). */
+    if((__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE) && \
+        (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && \
+        ((READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR2,RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)) == RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC_PLL2))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      if((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2State) == RCC_PLL2_ON)
+      {
+        /* Check the parameters */
+        assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL2_MUL(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2MUL));
+        assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.HSEPrediv2Value));
+
+        /* Prediv2 can be written only when the PLLI2S is disabled. */
+        /* Return an error only if new value is different from the programmed value */
+        if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR,RCC_CR_PLL3ON) && \
+          (__HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV2() != RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.HSEPrediv2Value))
+        {
+          return HAL_ERROR;
+        }
+        
+        /* Disable the main PLL2. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL2_DISABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL2 is disabled */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY) != RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+        
+        /* Configure the HSE prediv2 factor --------------------------------*/
+        __HAL_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.HSEPrediv2Value);
+
+        /* Configure the main PLL2 multiplication factors. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL2_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2MUL);
+        
+        /* Enable the main PLL2. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL2_ENABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL2 is ready */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY)  == RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+      else
+      {
+       /* Set PREDIV1 source to HSE */
+        CLEAR_BIT(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC);
+
+        /* Disable the main PLL2. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL2_DISABLE();
+ 
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL2 is disabled */  
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY)  != RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+#endif /* RCC_CR_PLL2ON */
+  /*-------------------------------- PLL Configuration -----------------------*/
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState));
+  if ((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState) != RCC_PLL_NONE)
+  {
+    /* Check if the PLL is used as system clock or not */
+    if(__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK)
+    { 
+      if((RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState) == RCC_PLL_ON)
+      {
+        /* Check the parameters */
+        assert_param(IS_RCC_PLLSOURCE(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource));
+        assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL));
+  
+        /* Disable the main PLL. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL_DISABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL is disabled */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY)  != RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+
+        /* Configure the HSE prediv factor --------------------------------*/
+        /* It can be written only when the PLL is disabled. Not used in PLL source is different than HSE */
+        if(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE)
+        {
+          /* Check the parameter */
+          assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE_PREDIV(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEPredivValue));
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)
+          assert_param(IS_RCC_PREDIV1_SOURCE(RCC_OscInitStruct->Prediv1Source));
+          
+          /* Set PREDIV1 source */
+          SET_BIT(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_OscInitStruct->Prediv1Source);
+#endif /* RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC */
+
+          /* Set PREDIV1 Value */
+          __HAL_RCC_HSE_PREDIV_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEPredivValue);
+        }
+
+        /* Configure the main PLL clock source and multiplication factors. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL_CONFIG(RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource,
+                             RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL);
+        /* Enable the main PLL. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL_ENABLE();
+        
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL is ready */
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY)  == RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* Disable the main PLL. */
+        __HAL_RCC_PLL_DISABLE();
+ 
+        /* Get Start Tick */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+        
+        /* Wait till PLL is disabled */  
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY)  != RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the CPU, AHB and APB buses clocks according to the specified 
+  *         parameters in the RCC_ClkInitStruct.
+  * @param  RCC_ClkInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the RCC peripheral.
+  * @param  FLatency FLASH Latency                   
+  *          The value of this parameter depend on device used within the same series
+  * @note   The SystemCoreClock CMSIS variable is used to store System Clock Frequency 
+  *         and updated by @ref HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq() function called within this function
+  *
+  * @note   The HSI is used (enabled by hardware) as system clock source after
+  *         start-up from Reset, wake-up from STOP and STANDBY mode, or in case
+  *         of failure of the HSE used directly or indirectly as system clock
+  *         (if the Clock Security System CSS is enabled).
+  *           
+  * @note   A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the target
+  *         clock source is ready (clock stable after start-up delay or PLL locked). 
+  *         If a clock source which is not yet ready is selected, the switch will
+  *         occur when the clock source will be ready. 
+  *         You can use @ref HAL_RCC_GetClockConfig() function to know which clock is
+  *         currently used as system clock source.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCC_ClockConfig(RCC_ClkInitTypeDef  *RCC_ClkInitStruct, uint32_t FLatency)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+  
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(RCC_ClkInitStruct != NULL);
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_CLOCKTYPE(RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType));
+  assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLatency));
+
+  /* To correctly read data from FLASH memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY) 
+  must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock 
+    (HCLK) of the device. */
+
+#if defined(FLASH_ACR_LATENCY)
+  /* Increasing the number of wait states because of higher CPU frequency */
+  if(FLatency > (FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_LATENCY))
+  {    
+    /* Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in the FLASH_ACR register */
+    __HAL_FLASH_SET_LATENCY(FLatency);
+    
+    /* Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash
+    memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register */
+    if((FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_LATENCY) != FLatency)
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }
+
+#endif /* FLASH_ACR_LATENCY */
+  /*-------------------------- HCLK Configuration --------------------------*/
+  if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK)
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider));
+    MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_HPRE, RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider);
+  }
+
+  /*------------------------- SYSCLK Configuration ---------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK)
+  {    
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource));
+    
+    /* HSE is selected as System Clock Source */
+    if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSE)
+    {
+      /* Check the HSE ready flag */  
+      if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) == RESET)
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    /* PLL is selected as System Clock Source */
+    else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_PLLCLK)
+    {
+      /* Check the PLL ready flag */  
+      if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) == RESET)
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    /* HSI is selected as System Clock Source */
+    else
+    {
+      /* Check the HSI ready flag */  
+      if(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) == RESET)
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+    __HAL_RCC_SYSCLK_CONFIG(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource);
+
+    /* Get Start Tick */
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_HSE)
+    {
+      while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else if(RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_PLLCLK)
+    {
+      while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      while (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() != RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > CLOCKSWITCH_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }      
+  }    
+#if defined(FLASH_ACR_LATENCY)
+  /* Decreasing the number of wait states because of lower CPU frequency */
+  if(FLatency < (FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_LATENCY))
+  {    
+    /* Program the new number of wait states to the LATENCY bits in the FLASH_ACR register */
+    __HAL_FLASH_SET_LATENCY(FLatency);
+    
+    /* Check that the new number of wait states is taken into account to access the Flash
+    memory by reading the FLASH_ACR register */
+    if((FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_LATENCY) != FLatency)
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+  }    
+#endif /* FLASH_ACR_LATENCY */
+
+  /*-------------------------- PCLK1 Configuration ---------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1)
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider));
+    MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_PPRE1, RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider);
+  }
+  
+  /*-------------------------- PCLK2 Configuration ---------------------------*/ 
+  if(((RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType) & RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2) == RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2)
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider));
+    MODIFY_REG(RCC->CFGR, RCC_CFGR_PPRE2, ((RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider) << 3));
+  }
+ 
+  /* Update the SystemCoreClock global variable */
+  SystemCoreClock = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq() >> AHBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE)>> RCC_CFGR_HPRE_BITNUMBER];
+
+  /* Configure the source of time base considering new system clocks settings*/
+  HAL_InitTick (TICK_INT_PRIORITY);
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Exported_Functions_Group2 Peripheral Control functions
+  *  @brief   RCC clocks control functions
+  *
+  @verbatim   
+  ===============================================================================
+                  ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+  ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the RCC Clocks 
+    frequencies.
+
+  @endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin.
+  * @note   MCO pin should be configured in alternate function mode.
+  * @param  RCC_MCOx specifies the output direction for the clock source.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1 Clock source to output on MCO1 pin(PA8).
+  * @param  RCC_MCOSource specifies the clock source to output.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_NOCLOCK     No clock selected as MCO clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_SYSCLK      System clock selected as MCO clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_HSI         HSI selected as MCO clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_HSE         HSE selected as MCO clock
+  @if STM32F105xC
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLLCLK       PLL clock divided by 2 selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL2CLK      PLL2 clock selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL3CLK_DIV2 PLL3 clock divided by 2 selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_EXT_HSE      XT1 external 3-25 MHz oscillator clock selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL3CLK      PLL3 clock selected as MCO source
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F107xC
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLLCLK       PLL clock divided by 2 selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL2CLK      PLL2 clock selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL3CLK_DIV2 PLL3 clock divided by 2 selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_EXT_HSE XT1  external 3-25 MHz oscillator clock selected as MCO source
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCO1SOURCE_PLL3CLK      PLL3 clock selected as MCO source
+  @endif
+  * @param  RCC_MCODiv specifies the MCO DIV.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_MCODIV_1 no division applied to MCO clock
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_MCOConfig(uint32_t RCC_MCOx, uint32_t RCC_MCOSource, uint32_t RCC_MCODiv)
+{
+  GPIO_InitTypeDef gpio = {0};
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO(RCC_MCOx));
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_MCODIV(RCC_MCODiv));
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO1SOURCE(RCC_MCOSource));
+  
+  /* Configure the MCO1 pin in alternate function mode */
+  gpio.Mode      = GPIO_MODE_AF_PP;
+  gpio.Speed     = GPIO_SPEED_FREQ_HIGH;
+  gpio.Pull      = GPIO_NOPULL;
+  gpio.Pin       = MCO1_PIN;
+
+  /* MCO1 Clock Enable */
+  MCO1_CLK_ENABLE();
+  
+  HAL_GPIO_Init(MCO1_GPIO_PORT, &gpio);
+  
+  /* Configure the MCO clock source */
+  __HAL_RCC_MCO1_CONFIG(RCC_MCOSource, RCC_MCODiv);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables the Clock Security System.
+  * @note   If a failure is detected on the HSE oscillator clock, this oscillator
+  *         is automatically disabled and an interrupt is generated to inform the
+  *         software about the failure (Clock Security System Interrupt, CSSI),
+  *         allowing the MCU to perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to 
+  *         the Cortex-M3 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.  
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_EnableCSS(void)
+{
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) RCC_CR_CSSON_BB = (uint32_t)ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disables the Clock Security System.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_DisableCSS(void)
+{
+  *(__IO uint32_t *) RCC_CR_CSSON_BB = (uint32_t)DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the SYSCLK frequency     
+  * @note   The system frequency computed by this function is not the real 
+  *         frequency in the chip. It is calculated based on the predefined 
+  *         constant and the selected clock source:
+  * @note     If SYSCLK source is HSI, function returns values based on HSI_VALUE(*)
+  * @note     If SYSCLK source is HSE, function returns a value based on HSE_VALUE
+  *           divided by PREDIV factor(**)
+  * @note     If SYSCLK source is PLL, function returns a value based on HSE_VALUE
+  *           divided by PREDIV factor(**) or HSI_VALUE(*) multiplied by the PLL factor.
+  * @note     (*) HSI_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f1xx_hal_conf.h file (default value
+  *               8 MHz) but the real value may vary depending on the variations
+  *               in voltage and temperature.
+  * @note     (**) HSE_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f1xx_hal_conf.h file (default value
+  *                8 MHz), user has to ensure that HSE_VALUE is same as the real
+  *                frequency of the crystal used. Otherwise, this function may
+  *                have wrong result.
+  *                  
+  * @note   The result of this function could be not correct when using fractional
+  *         value for HSE crystal.
+  *           
+  * @note   This function can be used by the user application to compute the 
+  *         baud-rate for the communication peripherals or configure other parameters.
+  *           
+  * @note   Each time SYSCLK changes, this function must be called to update the
+  *         right SYSCLK value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+  *         
+  * @retval SYSCLK frequency
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq(void)
+{
+#if   defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)
+  const uint8_t aPLLMULFactorTable[12] = {0, 0, 4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 0, 0, 0, 13};
+  const uint8_t aPredivFactorTable[16] = { 1, 2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16};
+#else
+  const uint8_t aPLLMULFactorTable[16] = { 2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 16};
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1)
+  const uint8_t aPredivFactorTable[16] = { 1, 2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16};
+#else
+  const uint8_t aPredivFactorTable[2] = { 1, 2};
+#endif /*RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1*/
+
+#endif
+  uint32_t tmpreg = 0, prediv = 0, pllclk = 0, pllmul = 0;
+  uint32_t sysclockfreq = 0;
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)
+  uint32_t prediv2 = 0, pll2mul = 0;
+#endif /*RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC*/
+  
+  tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+  
+  /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/
+  switch (tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_SWS)
+  {
+    case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSE:  /* HSE used as system clock */
+    {
+      sysclockfreq = HSE_VALUE;
+      break;
+    }
+    case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK:  /* PLL used as system clock */
+    {
+      pllmul = aPLLMULFactorTable[(uint32_t)(tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL)];
+      if ((tmpreg & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC) != RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI_DIV2)
+      {
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1)
+        prediv = aPredivFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1)];
+#else
+        prediv = aPredivFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLXTPRE) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLXTPRE)];
+#endif /*RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1*/
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)
+
+        if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC))
+        {
+          /* PLL2 selected as Prediv1 source */
+          /* PLLCLK = PLL2CLK / PREDIV1 * PLLMUL with PLL2CLK = HSE/PREDIV2 * PLL2MUL */
+          prediv2 = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2)) + 1;
+          pll2mul = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PLL2MUL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PLL2MUL)) + 2;
+          pllclk = (uint32_t)((((HSE_VALUE / prediv2) * pll2mul) / prediv) * pllmul);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* HSE used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSE/PREDIV1 * PLLMUL */
+          pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSE_VALUE / prediv) * pllmul);
+        }
+        
+        /* If PLLMUL was set to 13 means that it was to cover the case PLLMUL 6.5 (avoid using float) */
+        /* In this case need to divide pllclk by 2 */
+        if (pllmul == aPLLMULFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL6_5) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL)])
+        {
+            pllclk = pllclk / 2;
+        }
+#else
+        /* HSE used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSE/PREDIV1 * PLLMUL */
+        pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSE_VALUE / prediv) * pllmul);
+#endif /*RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC*/
+      }
+      else
+      {
+        /* HSI used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSI/2 * PLLMUL */
+        pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSI_VALUE >> 1) * pllmul);
+      }
+      sysclockfreq = pllclk;
+      break;
+    }
+    case RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_HSI:  /* HSI used as system clock source */
+    default: /* HSI used as system clock */
+    {
+      sysclockfreq = HSI_VALUE;
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  return sysclockfreq;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the HCLK frequency     
+  * @note   Each time HCLK changes, this function must be called to update the
+  *         right HCLK value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+  * 
+  * @note   The SystemCoreClock CMSIS variable is used to store System Clock Frequency 
+  *         and updated within this function
+  * @retval HCLK frequency
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq(void)
+{
+  return SystemCoreClock;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the PCLK1 frequency     
+  * @note   Each time PCLK1 changes, this function must be called to update the
+  *         right PCLK1 value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+  * @retval PCLK1 frequency
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetPCLK1Freq(void)
+{
+  /* Get HCLK source and Compute PCLK1 frequency ---------------------------*/
+  return (HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq() >> APBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE1) >> RCC_CFGR_PPRE1_BITNUMBER]);
+}    
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the PCLK2 frequency     
+  * @note   Each time PCLK2 changes, this function must be called to update the
+  *         right PCLK2 value. Otherwise, any configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+  * @retval PCLK2 frequency
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_RCC_GetPCLK2Freq(void)
+{
+  /* Get HCLK source and Compute PCLK2 frequency ---------------------------*/
+  return (HAL_RCC_GetHCLKFreq()>> APBPrescTable[(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE2) >> RCC_CFGR_PPRE2_BITNUMBER]);
+} 
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the RCC_OscInitStruct according to the internal 
+  * RCC configuration registers.
+  * @param  RCC_OscInitStruct pointer to an RCC_OscInitTypeDef structure that 
+  * will be configured.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_GetOscConfig(RCC_OscInitTypeDef  *RCC_OscInitStruct)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(RCC_OscInitStruct != NULL);
+
+  /* Set all possible values for the Oscillator type parameter ---------------*/
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->OscillatorType = RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSE | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_HSI  \
+                  | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSE | RCC_OSCILLATORTYPE_LSI;
+
+#if defined(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)
+  /* Get the Prediv1 source --------------------------------------------------*/
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->Prediv1Source = READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR2,RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC);
+#endif /* RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC */
+
+  /* Get the HSE configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSEBYP) == RCC_CR_HSEBYP)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_BYPASS;
+  }
+  else if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSEON) == RCC_CR_HSEON)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEState = RCC_HSE_OFF;
+  }
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->HSEPredivValue = __HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV();
+
+  /* Get the HSI configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_HSION) == RCC_CR_HSION)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState = RCC_HSI_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->HSIState = RCC_HSI_OFF;
+  }
+  
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->HSICalibrationValue = (uint32_t)((RCC->CR & RCC_CR_HSITRIM) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CR_HSITRIM));
+  
+  /* Get the LSE configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->BDCR &RCC_BDCR_LSEBYP) == RCC_BDCR_LSEBYP)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_BYPASS;
+  }
+  else if((RCC->BDCR &RCC_BDCR_LSEON) == RCC_BDCR_LSEON)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->LSEState = RCC_LSE_OFF;
+  }
+  
+  /* Get the LSI configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->CSR &RCC_CSR_LSION) == RCC_CSR_LSION)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState = RCC_LSI_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->LSIState = RCC_LSI_OFF;
+  }
+  
+
+  /* Get the PLL configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_PLLON) == RCC_CR_PLLON)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState = RCC_PLL_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLState = RCC_PLL_OFF;
+  }
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLSource = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC);
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL.PLLMUL = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL);
+#if defined(RCC_CR_PLL2ON)
+  /* Get the PLL2 configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  if((RCC->CR &RCC_CR_PLL2ON) == RCC_CR_PLL2ON)
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2State = RCC_PLL2_ON;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2State = RCC_PLL2_OFF;
+  }
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.HSEPrediv2Value = __HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV2();
+  RCC_OscInitStruct->PLL2.PLL2MUL = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PLL2MUL);
+#endif /* RCC_CR_PLL2ON */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Get the RCC_ClkInitStruct according to the internal 
+  * RCC configuration registers.
+  * @param  RCC_ClkInitStruct pointer to an RCC_ClkInitTypeDef structure that 
+  * contains the current clock configuration.
+  * @param  pFLatency Pointer on the Flash Latency.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_GetClockConfig(RCC_ClkInitTypeDef  *RCC_ClkInitStruct, uint32_t *pFLatency)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(RCC_ClkInitStruct != NULL);
+  assert_param(pFLatency != NULL);
+
+  /* Set all possible values for the Clock type parameter --------------------*/
+  RCC_ClkInitStruct->ClockType = RCC_CLOCKTYPE_SYSCLK | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_HCLK | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK1 | RCC_CLOCKTYPE_PCLK2;
+  
+  /* Get the SYSCLK configuration --------------------------------------------*/ 
+  RCC_ClkInitStruct->SYSCLKSource = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SW);
+  
+  /* Get the HCLK configuration ----------------------------------------------*/ 
+  RCC_ClkInitStruct->AHBCLKDivider = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE); 
+  
+  /* Get the APB1 configuration ----------------------------------------------*/ 
+  RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB1CLKDivider = (uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE1);   
+  
+  /* Get the APB2 configuration ----------------------------------------------*/ 
+  RCC_ClkInitStruct->APB2CLKDivider = (uint32_t)((RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE2) >> 3);
+  
+#if   defined(FLASH_ACR_LATENCY)
+  /* Get the Flash Wait State (Latency) configuration ------------------------*/   
+  *pFLatency = (uint32_t)(FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_LATENCY); 
+#else
+  /* For VALUE lines devices, only LATENCY_0 can be set*/
+  *pFLatency = (uint32_t)FLASH_LATENCY_0; 
+#endif
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief This function handles the RCC CSS interrupt request.
+  * @note This API should be called under the NMI_Handler().
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCC_NMI_IRQHandler(void)
+{
+  /* Check RCC CSSF flag  */
+  if(__HAL_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT_CSS))
+  {
+    /* RCC Clock Security System interrupt user callback */
+    HAL_RCC_CSSCallback();
+    
+    /* Clear RCC CSS pending bit */
+    __HAL_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT_CSS);
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  RCC Clock Security System interrupt callback
+  * @retval none
+  */
+__weak void HAL_RCC_CSSCallback(void)
+{
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+    the HAL_RCC_CSSCallback could be implemented in the user file
+    */ 
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c0cc7d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c
@@ -0,0 +1,870 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_rcc_ex.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   Extended RCC HAL module driver.
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities RCC extension peripheral:
+  *           + Extended Peripheral Control functions
+  *  
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************  
+  */ 
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx RCCEx
+  * @brief RCC Extension HAL module driver.
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Private_Constants RCCEx Private Constants
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Private_Macros RCCEx Private Macros
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions RCCEx Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 Peripheral Control functions 
+ *  @brief  Extended Peripheral Control functions  
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                ##### Extended Peripheral Control functions  #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the RCC Clocks 
+    frequencies.
+    [..] 
+    (@) Important note: Care must be taken when HAL_RCCEx_PeriphCLKConfig() is used to
+        select the RTC clock source; in this case the Backup domain will be reset in  
+        order to modify the RTC Clock source, as consequence RTC registers (including 
+        the backup registers) are set to their reset values.
+      
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the RCC extended peripherals clocks according to the specified parameters in the
+  *         RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef.
+  * @param  PeriphClkInit pointer to an RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the Extended Peripherals clocks(RTC clock).
+  *
+  * @note   Care must be taken when HAL_RCCEx_PeriphCLKConfig() is used to select 
+  *         the RTC clock source; in this case the Backup domain will be reset in  
+  *         order to modify the RTC Clock source, as consequence RTC registers (including 
+  *         the backup registers) are set to their reset values.
+  *
+  * @note   In case of STM32F105xC or STM32F107xC devices, PLLI2S will be enabled if requested on 
+  *         one of 2 I2S interfaces. When PLLI2S is enabled, you need to call HAL_RCCEx_DisablePLLI2S to
+  *         manually disable it.
+  *
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_PeriphCLKConfig(RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef  *PeriphClkInit)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0, temp_reg = 0;
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  uint32_t  pllactive = 0;
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_PERIPHCLOCK(PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection));
+  
+  /*------------------------------- RTC/LCD Configuration ------------------------*/ 
+  if ((((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC))
+  {
+    /* check for RTC Parameters used to output RTCCLK */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE(PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection));
+
+    /* Enable Power Clock*/
+    __HAL_RCC_PWR_CLK_ENABLE();
+    
+    /* Enable write access to Backup domain */
+    SET_BIT(PWR->CR, PWR_CR_DBP);
+    
+    /* Wait for Backup domain Write protection disable */
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    while((PWR->CR & PWR_CR_DBP) == RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > RCC_DBP_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }      
+    }
+      
+    /* Reset the Backup domain only if the RTC Clock source selection is modified from reset value */ 
+    temp_reg = (RCC->BDCR & RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL);
+    if((temp_reg != 0x00000000U) && (temp_reg != (PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection & RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL)))
+    {
+      /* Store the content of BDCR register before the reset of Backup Domain */
+      temp_reg = (RCC->BDCR & ~(RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL));
+      /* RTC Clock selection can be changed only if the Backup Domain is reset */
+      __HAL_RCC_BACKUPRESET_FORCE();
+      __HAL_RCC_BACKUPRESET_RELEASE();
+      /* Restore the Content of BDCR register */
+      RCC->BDCR = temp_reg;
+
+      /* Wait for LSERDY if LSE was enabled */
+      if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(temp_reg, RCC_BDCR_LSEON))
+      {
+        /* Get timeout */
+        tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+        /* Wait till LSE is ready */  
+        while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) == RESET)
+        {
+          if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart) > RCC_LSE_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+          {
+            return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+          }      
+        }  
+      }
+    }
+    __HAL_RCC_RTC_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection); 
+  }
+
+  /*------------------------------ ADC clock Configuration ------------------*/ 
+  if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_ADC) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_ADC)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_ADCPLLCLK_DIV(PeriphClkInit->AdcClockSelection));
+    
+    /* Configure the ADC clock source */
+    __HAL_RCC_ADC_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->AdcClockSelection);
+  }
+
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  /*------------------------------ I2S2 Configuration ------------------------*/ 
+  if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_I2S2CLKSOURCE(PeriphClkInit->I2s2ClockSelection));
+
+    /* Configure the I2S2 clock source */
+    __HAL_RCC_I2S2_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->I2s2ClockSelection);
+  }
+
+  /*------------------------------ I2S3 Configuration ------------------------*/ 
+  if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_I2S3CLKSOURCE(PeriphClkInit->I2s3ClockSelection));
+    
+    /* Configure the I2S3 clock source */
+    __HAL_RCC_I2S3_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->I2s3ClockSelection);
+  }
+
+  /*------------------------------ PLL I2S Configuration ----------------------*/ 
+  /* Check that PLLI2S need to be enabled */
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S2SRC) || HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S3SRC))
+  {
+    /* Update flag to indicate that PLL I2S should be active */
+    pllactive = 1;
+  }
+
+  /* Check if PLL I2S need to be enabled */
+  if (pllactive == 1)
+  {
+    /* Enable PLL I2S only if not active */
+    if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_PLL3ON))
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_RCC_PLLI2S_MUL(PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.PLLI2SMUL));
+      assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2(PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.HSEPrediv2Value));
+
+      /* Prediv2 can be written only when the PLL2 is disabled. */
+      /* Return an error only if new value is different from the programmed value */
+      if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR,RCC_CR_PLL2ON) && \
+        (__HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV2() != PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.HSEPrediv2Value))
+      {
+        return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+
+      /* Configure the HSE prediv2 factor --------------------------------*/
+      __HAL_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.HSEPrediv2Value);
+
+      /* Configure the main PLLI2S multiplication factors. */
+      __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.PLLI2SMUL);
+      
+      /* Enable the main PLLI2S. */
+      __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_ENABLE();
+      
+      /* Get Start Tick*/
+      tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+      
+      /* Wait till PLLI2S is ready */
+      while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY)  == RESET)
+      {
+        if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLLI2S_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+        {
+          return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+        }
+      }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      /* Return an error only if user wants to change the PLLI2SMUL whereas PLLI2S is active */
+      if (READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_PLL3MUL) != PeriphClkInit->PLLI2S.PLLI2SMUL)
+      {
+          return HAL_ERROR;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+#if defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || defined(STM32F103x6)\
+ || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)\
+ || defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  /*------------------------------ USB clock Configuration ------------------*/ 
+  if(((PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection) & RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB) == RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB)
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_USBPLLCLK_DIV(PeriphClkInit->UsbClockSelection));
+    
+    /* Configure the USB clock source */
+    __HAL_RCC_USB_CONFIG(PeriphClkInit->UsbClockSelection);
+  }
+#endif /* STM32F102x6 || STM32F102xB || STM32F103x6 || STM32F103xB || STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG || STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Get the PeriphClkInit according to the internal
+  * RCC configuration registers.
+  * @param  PeriphClkInit pointer to an RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef structure that 
+  *         returns the configuration information for the Extended Peripherals clocks(RTC, I2S, ADC clocks).
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_RCCEx_GetPeriphCLKConfig(RCC_PeriphCLKInitTypeDef  *PeriphClkInit)
+{
+  uint32_t srcclk = 0;
+  
+  /* Set all possible values for the extended clock type parameter------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection = RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC;
+
+  /* Get the RTC configuration -----------------------------------------------*/
+  srcclk = __HAL_RCC_GET_RTC_SOURCE();
+  /* Source clock is LSE or LSI*/
+  PeriphClkInit->RTCClockSelection = srcclk;
+
+  /* Get the ADC clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_ADC;
+  PeriphClkInit->AdcClockSelection = __HAL_RCC_GET_ADC_SOURCE();
+
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  /* Get the I2S2 clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2;
+  PeriphClkInit->I2s2ClockSelection = __HAL_RCC_GET_I2S2_SOURCE();
+
+  /* Get the I2S3 clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3;
+  PeriphClkInit->I2s3ClockSelection = __HAL_RCC_GET_I2S3_SOURCE();
+
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+#if defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)
+  /* Get the I2S2 clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2;
+  PeriphClkInit->I2s2ClockSelection = RCC_I2S2CLKSOURCE_SYSCLK;
+
+  /* Get the I2S3 clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3;
+  PeriphClkInit->I2s3ClockSelection = RCC_I2S3CLKSOURCE_SYSCLK;
+
+#endif /* STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG */
+
+#if defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || defined(STM32F103x6)\
+ || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)\
+ || defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  /* Get the USB clock configuration -----------------------------------------*/
+  PeriphClkInit->PeriphClockSelection |= RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB;
+  PeriphClkInit->UsbClockSelection = __HAL_RCC_GET_USB_SOURCE();
+#endif /* STM32F102x6 || STM32F102xB || STM32F103x6 || STM32F103xB || STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG || STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Returns the peripheral clock frequency
+  * @note   Returns 0 if peripheral clock is unknown
+  * @param  PeriphClk Peripheral clock identifier
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC  RTC peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_ADC  ADC peripheral clock
+  @if STM32F103xE
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F103xG
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F105xC
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB  USB peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F107xC
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3 I2S3 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2 I2S2 peripheral clock
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB  USB peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F102xx
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB  USB peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  @if STM32F103xx
+  *            @arg @ref RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB  USB peripheral clock
+  @endif
+  * @retval Frequency in Hz (0: means that no available frequency for the peripheral)
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_RCCEx_GetPeriphCLKFreq(uint32_t PeriphClk)
+{
+#if defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || defined(STM32F103x6)\
+ || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)\
+ || defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  const uint8_t aPLLMULFactorTable[12] = {0, 0, 4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 0, 0, 0, 13};
+  const uint8_t aPredivFactorTable[16] = { 1, 2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16};
+#else
+  const uint8_t aPLLMULFactorTable[16] = { 2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 16};
+  const uint8_t aPredivFactorTable[2] = { 1, 2};
+#endif
+#endif
+  uint32_t temp_reg = 0, frequency = 0;
+#if defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || defined(STM32F103x6)\
+ || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)\
+ || defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  uint32_t prediv1 = 0, pllclk = 0, pllmul = 0;
+#endif /* STM32F102x6 || STM32F102xB || STM32F103x6 || STM32F103xB || STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG || STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  uint32_t pll2mul = 0, pll3mul = 0, prediv2 = 0;
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_RCC_PERIPHCLOCK(PeriphClk));
+  
+  switch (PeriphClk)
+  {
+#if defined(STM32F102x6) || defined(STM32F102xB) || defined(STM32F103x6)\
+ || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)\
+ || defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  case RCC_PERIPHCLK_USB:  
+    {
+      /* Get RCC configuration ------------------------------------------------------*/
+      temp_reg = RCC->CFGR;
+  
+      /* Check if PLL is enabled */
+      if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR,RCC_CR_PLLON))
+      {
+        pllmul = aPLLMULFactorTable[(uint32_t)(temp_reg & RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL)];
+        if ((temp_reg & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC) != RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI_DIV2)
+        {
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC) || defined(STM32F100xB)\
+ || defined(STM32F100xE)
+          prediv1 = aPredivFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1)];
+#else
+          prediv1 = aPredivFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLXTPRE) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLXTPRE)];
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC || STM32F100xB || STM32F100xE */
+
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+          if(HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC))
+          {
+            /* PLL2 selected as Prediv1 source */
+            /* PLLCLK = PLL2CLK / PREDIV1 * PLLMUL with PLL2CLK = HSE/PREDIV2 * PLL2MUL */
+            prediv2 = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2)) + 1;
+            pll2mul = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PLL2MUL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PLL2MUL)) + 2;
+            pllclk = (uint32_t)((((HSE_VALUE / prediv2) * pll2mul) / prediv1) * pllmul);
+          }
+          else
+          {
+            /* HSE used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSE/PREDIV1 * PLLMUL */
+            pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSE_VALUE / prediv1) * pllmul);
+          }
+          
+          /* If PLLMUL was set to 13 means that it was to cover the case PLLMUL 6.5 (avoid using float) */
+          /* In this case need to divide pllclk by 2 */
+          if (pllmul == aPLLMULFactorTable[(uint32_t)(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL6_5) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL)])
+          {
+              pllclk = pllclk / 2;
+          }
+#else
+          if ((temp_reg & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC) != RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSI_DIV2)
+          {
+            /* HSE used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSE/PREDIV1 * PLLMUL */
+            pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSE_VALUE / prediv1) * pllmul);
+          }
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* HSI used as PLL clock source : PLLCLK = HSI/2 * PLLMUL */
+          pllclk = (uint32_t)((HSI_VALUE >> 1) * pllmul);
+        }
+
+        /* Calcul of the USB frequency*/
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+        /* USBCLK = PLLVCO = (2 x PLLCLK) / USB prescaler */
+        if (__HAL_RCC_GET_USB_SOURCE() == RCC_USBCLKSOURCE_PLL_DIV2)
+        {
+          /* Prescaler of 2 selected for USB */ 
+          frequency = pllclk;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Prescaler of 3 selected for USB */ 
+          frequency = (2 * pllclk) / 3;
+        }
+#else
+        /* USBCLK = PLLCLK / USB prescaler */
+        if (__HAL_RCC_GET_USB_SOURCE() == RCC_USBCLKSOURCE_PLL)
+        {
+          /* No prescaler selected for USB */
+          frequency = pllclk;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Prescaler of 1.5 selected for USB */ 
+          frequency = (pllclk * 2) / 3;
+        }
+#endif
+      }
+      break;
+    }
+#endif /* STM32F102x6 || STM32F102xB || STM32F103x6 || STM32F103xB || STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG || STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+#if defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || defined(STM32F105xC)\
+ || defined(STM32F107xC)
+  case RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S2:  
+    {
+#if defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)
+      /* SYSCLK used as source clock for I2S2 */
+      frequency = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq();
+#else
+      if (__HAL_RCC_GET_I2S2_SOURCE() == RCC_I2S2CLKSOURCE_SYSCLK)
+      {
+        /* SYSCLK used as source clock for I2S2 */
+        frequency = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq();
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         /* Check if PLLI2S is enabled */
+        if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_PLL3ON))
+        {
+          /* PLLI2SVCO = 2 * PLLI2SCLK = 2 * (HSE/PREDIV2 * PLL3MUL) */
+          prediv2 = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2)) + 1;
+          pll3mul = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PLL3MUL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PLL3MUL)) + 2;
+          frequency = (uint32_t)(2 * ((HSE_VALUE / prediv2) * pll3mul));
+        }
+      }
+#endif /* STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG */
+      break;
+    }
+  case RCC_PERIPHCLK_I2S3:
+    {
+#if defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG)
+      /* SYSCLK used as source clock for I2S3 */
+      frequency = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq();
+#else
+      if (__HAL_RCC_GET_I2S3_SOURCE() == RCC_I2S3CLKSOURCE_SYSCLK)
+      {
+        /* SYSCLK used as source clock for I2S3 */
+        frequency = HAL_RCC_GetSysClockFreq();
+      }
+      else
+      {
+         /* Check if PLLI2S is enabled */
+        if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_PLL3ON))
+        {
+          /* PLLI2SVCO = 2 * PLLI2SCLK = 2 * (HSE/PREDIV2 * PLL3MUL) */
+          prediv2 = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV2)) + 1;
+          pll3mul = ((RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PLL3MUL) >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR2_PLL3MUL)) + 2;
+          frequency = (uint32_t)(2 * ((HSE_VALUE / prediv2) * pll3mul));
+        }
+      }
+#endif /* STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG */
+      break;
+    }
+#endif /* STM32F103xE || STM32F103xG || STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+  case RCC_PERIPHCLK_RTC:  
+    {
+      /* Get RCC BDCR configuration ------------------------------------------------------*/
+      temp_reg = RCC->BDCR;
+
+      /* Check if LSE is ready if RTC clock selection is LSE */
+      if (((temp_reg & RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL) == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_LSE) && (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(temp_reg, RCC_BDCR_LSERDY)))
+      {
+        frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+      }
+      /* Check if LSI is ready if RTC clock selection is LSI */
+      else if (((temp_reg & RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL) == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_LSI) && (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CSR, RCC_CSR_LSIRDY)))
+      {
+        frequency = LSI_VALUE;
+      }
+      else if (((temp_reg & RCC_BDCR_RTCSEL) == RCC_RTCCLKSOURCE_HSE_DIV128) && (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR, RCC_CR_HSERDY)))
+      {
+        frequency = HSE_VALUE / 128;
+      }
+      /* Clock not enabled for RTC*/
+      else
+      {
+        frequency = 0;
+      }
+      break;
+    }
+  case RCC_PERIPHCLK_ADC:  
+    {
+      frequency = HAL_RCC_GetPCLK2Freq() / (((__HAL_RCC_GET_ADC_SOURCE() >> POSITION_VAL(RCC_CFGR_ADCPRE_DIV4)) + 1) * 2);
+      break;
+    }
+  default: 
+    {
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+  return(frequency);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#if defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions_Group2 PLLI2S Management function
+ *  @brief  PLLI2S Management functions
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                ##### Extended PLLI2S Management functions  #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the PLLI2S
+    activation or deactivation
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable PLLI2S
+  * @param  PLLI2SInit pointer to an RCC_PLLI2SInitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the PLLI2S
+  * @note   The PLLI2S configuration not modified if used by I2S2 or I2S3 Interface.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_EnablePLLI2S(RCC_PLLI2SInitTypeDef  *PLLI2SInit)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+
+  /* Check that PLL I2S has not been already enabled by I2S2 or I2S3*/
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S2SRC) && HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S3SRC))
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_PLLI2S_MUL(PLLI2SInit->PLLI2SMUL));
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2(PLLI2SInit->HSEPrediv2Value));
+
+    /* Prediv2 can be written only when the PLL2 is disabled. */
+    /* Return an error only if new value is different from the programmed value */
+    if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR,RCC_CR_PLL2ON) && \
+      (__HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV2() != PLLI2SInit->HSEPrediv2Value))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Disable the main PLLI2S. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_DISABLE();
+
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLLI2S is ready */  
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY)  != RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLLI2S_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* Configure the HSE prediv2 factor --------------------------------*/
+    __HAL_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2_CONFIG(PLLI2SInit->HSEPrediv2Value);
+    
+
+    /* Configure the main PLLI2S multiplication factors. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_CONFIG(PLLI2SInit->PLLI2SMUL);
+    
+    /* Enable the main PLLI2S. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_ENABLE();
+    
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLLI2S is ready */
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY)  == RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLLI2S_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* PLLI2S cannot be modified as already used by I2S2 or I2S3 */
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable PLLI2S
+  * @note   PLLI2S is not disabled if used by I2S2 or I2S3 Interface.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_DisablePLLI2S(void)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+
+  /* Disable PLL I2S as not requested by I2S2 or I2S3*/
+  if (HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S2SRC) && HAL_IS_BIT_CLR(RCC->CFGR2, RCC_CFGR2_I2S3SRC))
+  {
+    /* Disable the main PLLI2S. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLLI2S_DISABLE();
+
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLLI2S is ready */  
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY)  != RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLLI2S_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* PLLI2S is currently used by I2S2 or I2S3. Cannot be disabled.*/
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup RCCEx_Exported_Functions_Group3 PLL2 Management function
+ *  @brief  PLL2 Management functions
+ *
+@verbatim   
+ ===============================================================================
+                ##### Extended PLL2 Management functions  #####
+ ===============================================================================  
+    [..]
+    This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to control the PLL2
+    activation or deactivation
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enable PLL2
+  * @param  PLL2Init pointer to an RCC_PLL2InitTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the configuration information for the PLL2
+  * @note   The PLL2 configuration not modified if used indirectly as system clock.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_EnablePLL2(RCC_PLL2InitTypeDef  *PLL2Init)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+
+  /* This bit can not be cleared if the PLL2 clock is used indirectly as system 
+    clock (i.e. it is used as PLL clock entry that is used as system clock). */
+  if((__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE) && \
+        (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && \
+        ((READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR2,RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)) == RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC_PLL2))
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL2_MUL(PLL2Init->PLL2MUL));
+    assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2(PLL2Init->HSEPrediv2Value));
+
+    /* Prediv2 can be written only when the PLLI2S is disabled. */
+    /* Return an error only if new value is different from the programmed value */
+    if (HAL_IS_BIT_SET(RCC->CR,RCC_CR_PLL3ON) && \
+      (__HAL_RCC_HSE_GET_PREDIV2() != PLL2Init->HSEPrediv2Value))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /* Disable the main PLL2. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLL2_DISABLE();
+    
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLL2 is disabled */
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY) != RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+    
+    /* Configure the HSE prediv2 factor --------------------------------*/
+    __HAL_RCC_HSE_PREDIV2_CONFIG(PLL2Init->HSEPrediv2Value);
+
+    /* Configure the main PLL2 multiplication factors. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLL2_CONFIG(PLL2Init->PLL2MUL);
+    
+    /* Enable the main PLL2. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLL2_ENABLE();
+    
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLL2 is ready */
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY)  == RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Disable PLL2
+  * @note   PLL2 is not disabled if used indirectly as system clock.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_RCCEx_DisablePLL2(void)
+{
+  uint32_t tickstart = 0;
+
+  /* This bit can not be cleared if the PLL2 clock is used indirectly as system 
+    clock (i.e. it is used as PLL clock entry that is used as system clock). */
+  if((__HAL_RCC_GET_PLL_OSCSOURCE() == RCC_PLLSOURCE_HSE) && \
+        (__HAL_RCC_GET_SYSCLK_SOURCE() == RCC_SYSCLKSOURCE_STATUS_PLLCLK) && \
+        ((READ_BIT(RCC->CFGR2,RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC)) == RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1SRC_PLL2))
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* Disable the main PLL2. */
+    __HAL_RCC_PLL2_DISABLE();
+
+    /* Get Start Tick*/
+    tickstart = HAL_GetTick();
+    
+    /* Wait till PLL2 is disabled */  
+    while(__HAL_RCC_GET_FLAG(RCC_FLAG_PLL2RDY)  != RESET)
+    {
+      if((HAL_GetTick() - tickstart ) > PLL2_TIMEOUT_VALUE)
+      {
+        return HAL_TIMEOUT;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+#endif /* STM32F105xC || STM32F107xC */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_RCC_MODULE_ENABLED */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
+
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..938c948
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim.c
@@ -0,0 +1,5379 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_tim.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   TIM HAL module driver
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following 
+  *          functionalities of the Timer (TIM) peripheral:
+  *           + Time Base Initialization
+  *           + Time Base Start
+  *           + Time Base Start Interruption
+  *           + Time Base Start DMA
+  *           + Time Output Compare/PWM Initialization
+  *           + Time Output Compare/PWM Channel Configuration
+  *           + Time Output Compare/PWM  Start
+  *           + Time Output Compare/PWM  Start Interruption
+  *           + Time Output Compare/PWM Start DMA
+  *           + Time Input Capture Initialization
+  *           + Time Input Capture Channel Configuration
+  *           + Time Input Capture Start
+  *           + Time Input Capture Start Interruption 
+  *           + Time Input Capture Start DMA
+  *           + Time One Pulse Initialization
+  *           + Time One Pulse Channel Configuration
+  *           + Time One Pulse Start 
+  *           + Time Encoder Interface Initialization
+  *           + Time Encoder Interface Start
+  *           + Time Encoder Interface Start Interruption
+  *           + Time Encoder Interface Start DMA
+  *           + Commutation Event configuration with Interruption and DMA
+  *           + Time OCRef clear configuration
+  *           + Time External Clock configuration
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                      ##### TIMER Generic features #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..] The Timer features include:
+       (#) 16-bit up, down, up/down auto-reload counter.
+       (#) 16-bit programmable prescaler allowing dividing (also on the fly) the 
+           counter clock frequency either by any factor between 1 and 65536.
+       (#) Up to 4 independent channels for:
+           (++) Input Capture
+           (++) Output Compare
+           (++) PWM generation (Edge and Center-aligned Mode)
+           (++) One-pulse mode output 
+
+            ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+     (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources by implementing the following functions 
+         depending from feature used :
+           (++) Time Base : HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit()
+           (++) Input Capture : HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit()
+           (++) Output Compare : HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit()
+           (++) PWM generation : HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit()
+           (++) One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit()
+           (++) Encoder mode output : HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit()
+
+     (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources :
+        (##) Enable the TIM interface clock using __HAL_RCC_TIMx_CLK_ENABLE();
+        (##) TIM pins configuration
+            (+++) Enable the clock for the TIM GPIOs using the following function:
+             __HAL_RCC_GPIOx_CLK_ENABLE();
+            (+++) Configure these TIM pins in Alternate function mode using HAL_GPIO_Init();
+
+     (#) The external Clock can be configured, if needed (the default clock is the 
+         internal clock from the APBx), using the following function:
+         HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource, the clock configuration should be done before 
+         any start function.
+
+     (#) Configure the TIM in the desired functioning mode using one of the 
+       Initialization function of this driver:
+       (++) HAL_TIM_Base_Init: to use the Timer to generate a simple time base
+       (++) HAL_TIM_OC_Init and HAL_TIM_OC_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to generate an 
+            Output Compare signal.
+       (++) HAL_TIM_PWM_Init and HAL_TIM_PWM_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to generate a 
+            PWM signal.
+       (++) HAL_TIM_IC_Init and HAL_TIM_IC_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer to measure an 
+            external signal.
+         (++) HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Init and HAL_TIM_OnePulse_ConfigChannel: to use the Timer 
+              in One Pulse Mode.
+       (++) HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init: to use the Timer Encoder Interface.
+
+     (#) Activate the TIM peripheral using one of the start functions depending from the feature used:
+           (++) Time Base : HAL_TIM_Base_Start(), HAL_TIM_Base_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_Base_Start_IT()
+           (++) Input Capture :  HAL_TIM_IC_Start(), HAL_TIM_IC_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_IC_Start_IT()
+           (++) Output Compare : HAL_TIM_OC_Start(), HAL_TIM_OC_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_OC_Start_IT()
+           (++) PWM generation : HAL_TIM_PWM_Start(), HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_IT()
+           (++) One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start(), HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start_IT()
+           (++) Encoder mode output : HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start(), HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_IT().
+
+     (#) The DMA Burst is managed with the two following functions:
+         HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStart()
+         HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStart()
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+  */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM TIM
+  * @brief TIM HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/** @defgroup TIM_Private_Functions TIM Private Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+static void TIM_OC1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_OC3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_OC4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config);
+static void TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_TI4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TIM_ETR_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint32_t ExtTRGFilter);
+static void TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t InputTriggerSource);
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void TIM_DMATriggerCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma);
+static void TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+                                     TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef * sSlaveConfig);
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions TIM Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group1 Time Base functions 
+ *  @brief    Time Base functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+              ##### Time Base functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure the TIM base.
+    (+) De-initialize the TIM base.
+    (+) Start the Time Base.
+    (+) Stop the Time Base.
+    (+) Start the Time Base and enable interrupt.
+    (+) Stop the Time Base and disable interrupt.
+    (+) Start the Time Base and enable DMA transfer.
+    (+) Stop the Time Base and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Time base Unit according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Base handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+    HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Set the Time Base configuration */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM Base peripheral 
+  * @param  htim : TIM Base handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+  HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Base MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_Base_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM Base MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_Base_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Base generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Base generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Base generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+   /* Enable the TIM Update interrupt */
+   __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+
+   /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Base generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  /* Disable the TIM Update interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Base generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  pData : The source Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from memory to peripheral.
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if((pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+
+  /* Set the DMA error callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+  /* Enable the DMA channel */
+  HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->ARR, Length);
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Update DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_UPDATE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Base generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_UPDATE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group2 Time Output Compare functions 
+ *  @brief    Time Output Compare functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                  ##### Time Output Compare functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Output Compare.
+    (+) De-initialize the TIM Output Compare.
+    (+) Start the Time Output Compare.
+    (+) Stop the Time Output Compare.
+    (+) Start the Time Output Compare and enable interrupt.
+    (+) Stop the Time Output Compare and disable interrupt.
+    (+) Start the Time Output Compare and enable DMA transfer.
+    (+) Stop the Time Output Compare and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Output Compare according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim)
+{
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Init the base time for the Output Compare */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance,  &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM peripheral 
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+   htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+  HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Output Compare MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM Output Compare MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_OC_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle 
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected 
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM OC handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @param  pData : The source Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if(((uint32_t)pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3,Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+     /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Output compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group3 Time PWM functions 
+ *  @brief    Time PWM functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                          ##### Time PWM functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure the TIM PWM.
+    (+) De-initialize the TIM PWM.
+    (+) Start the Time PWM.
+    (+) Stop the Time PWM.
+    (+) Start the Time PWM and enable interrupt.
+    (+) Stop the Time PWM and disable interrupt.
+    (+) Start the Time PWM and enable DMA transfer.
+    (+) Stop the Time PWM and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM PWM Time Base according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Init the base time for the PWM */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM peripheral 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+  HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM PWM MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM PWM MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_PWM_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the PWM signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the PWM signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop_IT (TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @param  pData : The source Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if(((uint32_t)pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3,Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Capture/Compare 3 request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+     /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group4 Time Input Capture functions 
+ *  @brief    Time Input Capture functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+              ##### Time Input Capture functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+   This section provides functions allowing to:
+   (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Input Capture.
+   (+) De-initialize the TIM Input Capture.
+   (+) Start the Time Input Capture.
+   (+) Stop the Time Input Capture.
+   (+) Start the Time Input Capture and enable interrupt.
+   (+) Stop the Time Input Capture and disable interrupt.
+   (+) Start the Time Input Capture and enable DMA transfer.
+   (+) Stop the Time Input Capture and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Input Capture Time base according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Init the base time for the input capture */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM peripheral 
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+  HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Input Capture MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_IC_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM Input Capture MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_IC_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start (TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start_IT (TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Input Capture measurement in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @param  pData : The destination Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from TIM peripheral to memory.
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if((pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3, (uint32_t)pData, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, (uint32_t)pData, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Input Capture measurement in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Input Capture handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group5 Time One Pulse functions 
+ *  @brief    Time One Pulse functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### Time One Pulse functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure the TIM One Pulse.
+    (+) De-initialize the TIM One Pulse.
+    (+) Start the Time One Pulse.
+    (+) Stop the Time One Pulse.
+    (+) Start the Time One Pulse and enable interrupt.
+    (+) Stop the Time One Pulse and disable interrupt.
+    (+) Start the Time One Pulse and enable DMA transfer.
+    (+) Stop the Time One Pulse and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM One Pulse Time Base according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_HandleTypeDef and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM OnePulse handle
+  * @param  OnePulseMode : Select the One pulse mode.
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_OPMODE_SINGLE: Only one pulse will be generated.
+  *            @arg TIM_OPMODE_REPETITIVE: Repetitive pulses wil be generated.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OnePulseMode)
+{
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_MODE(OnePulseMode));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Configure the Time base in the One Pulse Mode */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Reset the OPM Bit */
+  htim->Instance->CR1 &= ~TIM_CR1_OPM;
+
+  /* Configure the OPM Mode */
+  htim->Instance->CR1 |= OnePulseMode;
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM One Pulse 
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+  HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM One Pulse MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM One Pulse MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Enable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels 
+    (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+    if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+    if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output 
+    in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be enabled together 
+
+    No need to enable the counter, it's enabled automatically by hardware 
+    (the counter starts in response to a stimulus and generate a pulse */
+
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channels to be disable
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Disable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels
+  (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+  if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+  if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output 
+  in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be disabled together */
+
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Enable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels 
+    (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+    if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+    if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output 
+    in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be enabled together 
+
+    No need to enable the counter, it's enabled automatically by hardware 
+    (the counter starts in response to a stimulus and generate a pulse */
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Enable the main output */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare and the Input Capture channels 
+  (in the OPM Mode the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+  if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as output, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as input and
+  if TIM_CHANNEL_1 is used as input, the TIM_CHANNEL_2 will be used as output 
+  in all combinations, the TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2 should be disabled together */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance) != RESET)
+  {
+    /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+   __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group6 Time Encoder functions 
+ *  @brief    Time Encoder functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                          ##### Time Encoder functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure the TIM Encoder.
+    (+) De-initialize the TIM Encoder.
+    (+) Start the Time Encoder.
+    (+) Stop the Time Encoder.
+    (+) Start the Time Encoder and enable interrupt.
+    (+) Stop the Time Encoder and disable interrupt.
+    (+) Start the Time Encoder and enable DMA transfer.
+    (+) Stop the Time Encoder and disable DMA transfer.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Encoder Interface and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM Encoder Interface configuration structure
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,  TIM_Encoder_InitTypeDef* sConfig)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_ENCODER_MODE(sConfig->EncoderMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->IC1Selection));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->IC2Selection));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->IC1Polarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->IC2Polarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->IC1Prescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->IC2Prescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->IC1Filter));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->IC2Filter));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Reset the SMS bits */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+
+  /* Configure the Time base in the Encoder Mode */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+  tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+  tmpccmr1 = htim->Instance->CCMR1;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+  tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+
+  /* Set the encoder Mode */
+  tmpsmcr |= sConfig->EncoderMode;
+
+  /* Select the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 as input */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_CC1S | TIM_CCMR1_CC2S);
+  tmpccmr1 |= (sConfig->IC1Selection | (sConfig->IC2Selection << 8));
+
+  /* Set the the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 prescalers and filters */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC | TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC);
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~(TIM_CCMR1_IC1F | TIM_CCMR1_IC2F);
+  tmpccmr1 |= sConfig->IC1Prescaler | (sConfig->IC2Prescaler << 8);
+  tmpccmr1 |= (sConfig->IC1Filter << 4) | (sConfig->IC2Filter << 12);
+
+  /* Set the TI1 and the TI2 Polarities */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC2P);
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1NP | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+  tmpccer |= sConfig->IC1Polarity | (sConfig->IC2Polarity << 4);
+
+  /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+  htim->Instance->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+  htim->Instance->CCER = tmpccer;
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM Encoder interface 
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+  HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Encoder Interface MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM Encoder Interface MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_Encoder_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Encoder Interface.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Enable the encoder interface channels */
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+      break;
+  }
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+      break;
+  }
+    default :
+  {
+     TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+     TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+     break;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Encoder Interface.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+   /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+    (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+  {
+     TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+      break;
+  }
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+      break;
+  }
+    default :
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+     break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Encoder Interface in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Enable the encoder interface channels */
+  /* Enable the capture compare Interrupts 1 and/or 2 */
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+    __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+      break;
+  }
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+    __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+      break;
+  }
+    default :
+  {
+     TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+     TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+     __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+     __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+     break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Encoder Interface in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+    (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+  if(Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 1 */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+  }
+  else if(Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 2 */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 1 and 2 */
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Encoder Interface in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @param  pData1 : The destination Buffer address for IC1.
+  * @param  pData2 : The destination Buffer address for IC2.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from TIM peripheral to memory.
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData1, uint32_t *pData2, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if((((pData1 == 0) || (pData2 == 0) )) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t )pData1, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Input Capture DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+
+      /* Enable the Peripheral */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+      /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+      TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError;
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData2, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Input Capture  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+
+      /* Enable the Peripheral */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+      /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+      TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_ALL:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData1, Length);
+
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, (uint32_t)pData2, Length);
+
+     /* Enable the Peripheral */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+      /* Enable the Capture compare channel */
+      TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+      TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Input Capture  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+      /* Enable the TIM Input Capture  DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Encoder Interface in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_ALL: TIM Channel 1 and TIM Channel 2 are selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+*/
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_CC_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channels 1 and 2
+    (in the EncoderInterface the two possible channels that can be used are TIM_CHANNEL_1 and TIM_CHANNEL_2) */
+  if(Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 1 */
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+  }
+  else if(Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 2 */
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+    TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_2, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+    /* Disable the capture compare DMA Request 1 and 2 */
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group7 TIM IRQ handler management 
+ *  @brief    IRQ handler management 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### IRQ handler management #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides Timer IRQ handler function.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  This function handles TIM interrupts requests.
+  * @param  htim : TIM  handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void HAL_TIM_IRQHandler(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Capture compare 1 event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC1) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC1) !=RESET)
+    {
+      {
+        __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+        htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+
+        /* Input capture event */
+        if((htim->Instance->CCMR1 & TIM_CCMR1_CC1S) != 0x00)
+        {
+          HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+        }
+        /* Output compare event */
+        else
+        {
+          HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+          HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+        }
+        htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  /* Capture compare 2 event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC2) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC2) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+      /* Input capture event */
+      if((htim->Instance->CCMR1 & TIM_CCMR1_CC2S) != 0x00)
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+      }
+      /* Output compare event */
+      else
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+        HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+      }
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Capture compare 3 event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC3) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC3) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+      /* Input capture event */
+      if((htim->Instance->CCMR2 & TIM_CCMR2_CC3S) != 0x00)
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+      }
+      /* Output compare event */
+      else
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+        HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+      }
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Capture compare 4 event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_CC4) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_CC4) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+      /* Input capture event */
+      if((htim->Instance->CCMR2 & TIM_CCMR2_CC4S) != 0x00)
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+      }
+      /* Output compare event */
+      else
+      {
+        HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(htim);
+        HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+      }
+      htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+    }
+  }
+  /* TIM Update event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_UPDATE) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_UPDATE);
+      HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+    }
+  }
+  /* TIM Break input event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_BREAK) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK);
+      HAL_TIMEx_BreakCallback(htim);
+    }
+  }
+  /* TIM Trigger detection event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_TRIGGER) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+      HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(htim);
+    }
+  }
+  /* TIM commutation event */
+  if(__HAL_TIM_GET_FLAG(htim, TIM_FLAG_COM) != RESET)
+  {
+    if(__HAL_TIM_GET_IT_SOURCE(htim, TIM_IT_COM) !=RESET)
+    {
+      __HAL_TIM_CLEAR_IT(htim, TIM_FLAG_COM);
+      HAL_TIMEx_CommutationCallback(htim);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group8 Peripheral Control functions
+ *  @brief   	Peripheral Control functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                   ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+   This section provides functions allowing to:
+      (+) Configure The Input Output channels for OC, PWM, IC or One Pulse mode.
+      (+) Configure External Clock source.
+      (+) Configure Complementary channels, break features and dead time.
+      (+) Configure Master and the Slave synchronization.
+      (+) Configure the DMA Burst Mode.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Output Compare Channels according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_OC_InitTypeDef.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM Output Compare configuration structure
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected 
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef* sConfig, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(sConfig->OCMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(sConfig->OCPolarity));
+
+  /* Check input state */
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the TIM Channel 1 in Output Compare */
+      TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the TIM Channel 2 in Output Compare */
+      TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+       assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the TIM Channel 3 in Output Compare */
+      TIM_OC3_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+       /* Configure the TIM Channel 4 in Output Compare */
+       TIM_OC4_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Input Capture Channels according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_IC_InitTypeDef.
+  * @param  htim : TIM IC handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM Input Capture configuration structure
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected 
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_IC_InitTypeDef* sConfig, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->ICPolarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(sConfig->ICSelection));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->ICPrescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->ICFilter));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_1)
+  {
+    /* TI1 Configuration */
+    TIM_TI1_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+               sConfig->ICPolarity,
+               sConfig->ICSelection,
+               sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+    /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC;
+
+    /* Set the IC1PSC value */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->ICPrescaler;
+  }
+  else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_2)
+  {
+    /* TI2 Configuration */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+    TIM_TI2_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+                      sConfig->ICPolarity,
+                      sConfig->ICSelection,
+                      sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+    /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC;
+
+    /* Set the IC2PSC value */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= (sConfig->ICPrescaler << 8);
+  }
+  else if (Channel == TIM_CHANNEL_3)
+  {
+    /* TI3 Configuration */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+    TIM_TI3_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+               sConfig->ICPolarity,
+               sConfig->ICSelection,
+               sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+    /* Reset the IC3PSC Bits */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC3PSC;
+
+    /* Set the IC3PSC value */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->ICPrescaler;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    /* TI4 Configuration */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+    TIM_TI4_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+               sConfig->ICPolarity,
+               sConfig->ICSelection,
+               sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+    /* Reset the IC4PSC Bits */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC4PSC;
+
+    /* Set the IC4PSC value */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= (sConfig->ICPrescaler << 8);
+  }
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM PWM  channels according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_OC_InitTypeDef.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM PWM configuration structure
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef* sConfig, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_PWM_MODE(sConfig->OCMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(sConfig->OCPolarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_FAST_STATE(sConfig->OCFastMode));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the Channel 1 in PWM mode */
+      TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+      /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel1 */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC1PE;
+
+      /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC1FE;
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->OCFastMode;
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the Channel 2 in PWM mode */
+      TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+      /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel2 */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC2PE;
+
+      /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC2FE;
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->OCFastMode << 8;
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the Channel 3 in PWM mode */
+      TIM_OC3_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+      /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel3 */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC3PE;
+
+     /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC3FE;
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->OCFastMode;
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Configure the Channel 4 in PWM mode */
+      TIM_OC4_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig);
+
+      /* Set the Preload enable bit for channel4 */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC4PE;
+
+     /* Configure the Output Fast mode */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC4FE;
+      htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= sConfig->OCFastMode << 8;
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM One Pulse Channels according to the specified
+  *         parameters in the TIM_OnePulse_InitTypeDef.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM One Pulse configuration structure
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @param  InputChannel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_ConfigChannel(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,  TIM_OnePulse_InitTypeDef* sConfig, uint32_t OutputChannel,  uint32_t InputChannel)
+{
+  TIM_OC_InitTypeDef temp1;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_CHANNELS(OutputChannel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_CHANNELS(InputChannel));
+
+  if(OutputChannel != InputChannel)
+  {
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Extract the Ouput compare configuration from sConfig structure */
+  temp1.OCMode = sConfig->OCMode;
+  temp1.Pulse = sConfig->Pulse;
+  temp1.OCPolarity = sConfig->OCPolarity;
+  temp1.OCNPolarity = sConfig->OCNPolarity;
+  temp1.OCIdleState = sConfig->OCIdleState;
+  temp1.OCNIdleState = sConfig->OCNIdleState;
+
+    switch (OutputChannel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+        assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_OC1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &temp1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+        assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &temp1);
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+  switch (InputChannel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_TI1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig->ICPolarity,
+                        sConfig->ICSelection, sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+      /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+    htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC;
+
+      /* Select the Trigger source */
+        htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_TS_TI1FP1;
+
+      /* Select the Slave Mode */
+        htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER;
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_TI2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig->ICPolarity,
+                 sConfig->ICSelection, sConfig->ICFilter);
+
+      /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+        htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC;
+
+      /* Select the Trigger source */
+        htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_TS_TI2FP2;
+
+      /* Select the Slave Mode */
+        htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SLAVEMODE_TRIGGER;
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+  else
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the DMA Burst to transfer Data from the memory to the TIM peripheral 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  BurstBaseAddress : TIM Base address from where the DMA will start the Data write
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR1 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_SMCR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_DIER
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_SR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_EGR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR1
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCER
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CNT 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_PSC 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_ARR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_RCR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR1
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR3 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR4
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_BDTR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_DCR
+  * @param  BurstRequestSrc : TIM DMA Request sources
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_UPDATE: TIM update Interrupt source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_COM: TIM Commutation DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_TRIGGER: TIM Trigger DMA source
+  * @param  BurstBuffer : The Buffer address.
+  * @param  BurstLength : DMA Burst length. This parameter can be one value
+  *         between: TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_1TRANSFER and TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_18TRANSFERS.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStart(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstBaseAddress, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc,
+                                              uint32_t* BurstBuffer, uint32_t  BurstLength)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMABURST_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(BurstBaseAddress));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(BurstLength));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if((BurstBuffer == 0 ) && (BurstLength > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch(BurstRequestSrc)
+  {
+    case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_COM:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferCpltCallback =  TIMEx_DMACommutationCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER], (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+   /* configure the DMA Burst Mode */
+   htim->Instance->DCR = BurstBaseAddress | BurstLength;
+
+   /* Enable the TIM DMA Request */
+   __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+   htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM DMA Burst mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  BurstRequestSrc : TIM DMA Request sources to disable
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_WriteStop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+
+  /* Abort the DMA transfer (at least disable the DMA channel) */
+  switch(BurstRequestSrc)
+  {
+    case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_COM:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]);
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the DMA Burst to transfer Data from the TIM peripheral to the memory 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  BurstBaseAddress : TIM Base address from where the DMA will starts the Data read
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR1 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_SMCR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_DIER
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_SR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_EGR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR1
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCMR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCER
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CNT 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_PSC 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_ARR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_RCR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR1
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR2
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR3 
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_CCR4
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_BDTR
+  *            @arg TIM_DMABASE_DCR
+  * @param  BurstRequestSrc : TIM DMA Request sources
+  *         This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_UPDATE: TIM update Interrupt source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_COM: TIM Commutation DMA source
+  *            @arg TIM_DMA_TRIGGER: TIM Trigger DMA source
+  * @param  BurstBuffer : The Buffer address.
+  * @param  BurstLength : DMA Burst length. This parameter can be one value
+  *         between: TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_1TRANSFER and TIM_DMABURSTLENGTH_18TRANSFERS.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStart(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstBaseAddress, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc,
+                                             uint32_t  *BurstBuffer, uint32_t  BurstLength)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMABURST_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(BurstBaseAddress));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(BurstLength));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if((BurstBuffer == 0 ) && (BurstLength > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch(BurstRequestSrc)
+  {
+    case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+       HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback =  TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_COM:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferCpltCallback =  TIMEx_DMACommutationCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMATriggerCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->DMAR, (uint32_t)BurstBuffer, ((BurstLength) >> 8) + 1);
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* configure the DMA Burst Mode */
+  htim->Instance->DCR = BurstBaseAddress | BurstLength;
+
+  /* Enable the TIM DMA Request */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stop the DMA burst reading 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  BurstRequestSrc : TIM DMA Request sources to disable.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_DMABurst_ReadStop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t BurstRequestSrc)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(BurstRequestSrc));
+
+  /* Abort the DMA transfer (at least disable the DMA channel) */
+  switch(BurstRequestSrc)
+  {
+    case TIM_DMA_UPDATE:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_UPDATE]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC1:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC2:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC3:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_CC4:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_COM:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]);
+    }
+    break;
+    case TIM_DMA_TRIGGER:
+    {
+      HAL_DMA_Abort(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_TRIGGER]);
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Update DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, BurstRequestSrc);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Generate a software event
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  EventSource : specifies the event source.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_UPDATE: Timer update Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC1: Timer Capture Compare 1 Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC2: Timer Capture Compare 2 Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC3: Timer Capture Compare 3 Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_CC4: Timer Capture Compare 4 Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_COM: Timer COM event source 
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_TRIGGER: Timer Trigger Event source
+  *            @arg TIM_EVENTSOURCE_BREAK: Timer Break event source
+  * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can only generate an update event.
+  * @note TIM_EVENTSOURCE_COM and TIM_EVENTSOURCE_BREAK are used only with TIM1, TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_GenerateEvent(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t EventSource)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_EVENT_SOURCE(EventSource));
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  /* Change the TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Set the event sources */
+  htim->Instance->EGR = EventSource;
+
+  /* Change the TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the OCRef clear feature
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  sClearInputConfig : pointer to a TIM_ClearInputConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the OCREF clear feature and parameters for the TIM peripheral.
+  * @param  Channel : specifies the TIM Channel
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */ 
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigOCrefClear(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_ClearInputConfigTypeDef * sClearInputConfig, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OCXREF_CLEAR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_SOURCE(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputSource));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_POLARITY(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPolarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_PRESCALER(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPrescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEARINPUT_FILTER(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputFilter));
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  switch (sClearInputConfig->ClearInputSource)
+  {
+    case TIM_CLEARINPUTSOURCE_NONE:
+    {
+      /* Clear the OCREF clear selection bit */
+      tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_OCCS;
+
+      /* Clear the ETR Bits */
+      tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP);
+
+      /* Set TIMx_SMCR */
+      htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+   }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CLEARINPUTSOURCE_ETR:
+    {
+      TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+                        sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPrescaler,
+                        sClearInputConfig->ClearInputPolarity,
+                        sClearInputConfig->ClearInputFilter);
+
+      /* Set the OCREF clear selection bit */
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SMCR_OCCS;
+    }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+      {
+        if(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != RESET)
+        {
+          /* Enable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 1 */
+          htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC1CE;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Disable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 1 */
+        htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC1CE;
+        }
+      }
+      break;
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+      {
+        assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+        if(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != RESET)
+        {
+          /* Enable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 2 */
+          htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= TIM_CCMR1_OC2CE;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Disable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 2 */
+          htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC2CE;
+        }
+      }
+    break;
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+      {
+        assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+        if(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != RESET)
+        {
+          /* Enable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 3 */
+          htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC3CE;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Disable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 3 */
+        htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC3CE;
+        }
+      }
+    break;
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+      {
+        assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+        if(sClearInputConfig->ClearInputState != RESET)
+        {
+          /* Enable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 4 */
+          htim->Instance->CCMR2 |= TIM_CCMR2_OC4CE;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+          /* Disable the Ocref clear feature for Channel 4 */
+        htim->Instance->CCMR2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC4CE;
+        }
+      }
+    break;
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief   Configures the clock source to be used
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  sClockSourceConfig : pointer to a TIM_ClockConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the clock source information for the TIM peripheral.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */ 
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_ClockConfigTypeDef * sClockSourceConfig)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE(sClockSourceConfig->ClockSource));
+
+  /* Reset the SMS, TS, ECE, ETPS and ETRF bits */
+  tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+  tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_SMS | TIM_SMCR_TS);
+  tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP);
+  htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+  switch (sClockSourceConfig->ClockSource)
+  {
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_INTERNAL:
+    {
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      /* Disable slave mode to clock the prescaler directly with the internal clock */
+      htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external trigger input mode 1 (ETRF)*/
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Check ETR input conditioning related parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPRESCALER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+      
+      /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+      TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+      /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+      tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+      /* Reset the SMS and TS Bits */
+      tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_SMS | TIM_SMCR_TS);
+      /* Select the External clock mode1 and the ETRF trigger */
+      tmpsmcr |= (TIM_SLAVEMODE_EXTERNAL1 | TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1);
+      /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+      htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE2:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external trigger input mode 2 (ETRF)*/
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Check ETR input conditioning related parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPRESCALER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+      
+      /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+      TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockPrescaler,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+                        sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+      /* Enable the External clock mode2 */
+      htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SMCR_ECE;
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Check TI1 input conditioning related parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+      
+      TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI2:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 (ETRF)*/
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+       /* Check TI2 input conditioning related parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+      TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI2);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1ED:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TIX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Check TI1 input conditioning related parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKPOLARITY(sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKFILTER(sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter));
+
+      TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockPolarity,
+                               sClockSourceConfig->ClockFilter);
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_TI1ED);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR0:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITRX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR0);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR1:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITRX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR1);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR2:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITRX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR2);
+    }
+    break;
+  case TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR3:
+    {
+      /* Check whether or not the timer instance supports external clock mode 1 */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITRX_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(htim->Instance, TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ITR3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Selects the signal connected to the TI1 input: direct from CH1_input
+  *         or a XOR combination between CH1_input, CH2_input & CH3_input
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle.
+  * @param  TI1_Selection : Indicate whether or not channel 1 is connected to the
+  *         output of a XOR gate.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_TI1SELECTION_CH1: The TIMx_CH1 pin is connected to TI1 input
+  *            @arg TIM_TI1SELECTION_XORCOMBINATION: The TIMx_CH1, CH2 and CH3
+  *            pins are connected to the TI1 input (XOR combination)
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_ConfigTI1Input(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t TI1_Selection)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_TI1SELECTION(TI1_Selection));
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+  tmpcr2 = htim->Instance->CR2;
+
+  /* Reset the TI1 selection */
+  tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_TI1S;
+
+  /* Set the the TI1 selection */
+  tmpcr2 |= TI1_Selection;
+
+  /* Write to TIMxCR2 */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the TIM in Slave mode
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle.
+  * @param  sSlaveConfig : pointer to a TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the selected trigger (internal trigger input, filtered
+  *         timer input or external trigger input) and the ) and the Slave 
+  *         mode (Disable, Reset, Gated, Trigger, External clock mode 1).
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_SlaveConfigSynchronization(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef * sSlaveConfig)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(htim, sSlaveConfig);
+
+  /* Disable Trigger Interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+
+  /* Disable Trigger DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_TRIGGER);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+    }
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the TIM in Slave mode in interrupt mode
+  * @param  htim: TIM handle.
+  * @param  sSlaveConfig: pointer to a TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the selected trigger (internal trigger input, filtered
+  *         timer input or external trigger input) and the ) and the Slave 
+  *         mode (Disable, Reset, Gated, Trigger, External clock mode 1).
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIM_SlaveConfigSynchronization_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+                                                        TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef * sSlaveConfig)
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(htim, sSlaveConfig);
+
+  /* Enable Trigger Interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_TRIGGER);
+
+  /* Disable Trigger DMA request */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_TRIGGER);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Read the captured value from Capture Compare unit
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle.
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channels to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1 : TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2 : TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3 : TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4 : TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval Captured value
+  */
+uint32_t HAL_TIM_ReadCapturedValue(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+  case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Return the capture 1 value */
+      tmpreg =  htim->Instance->CCR1;
+
+      break;
+    }
+  case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Return the capture 2 value */
+      tmpreg =   htim->Instance->CCR2;
+
+      break;
+    }
+
+  case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC3_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Return the capture 3 value */
+      tmpreg =   htim->Instance->CCR3;
+
+      break;
+    }
+
+  case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC4_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+      /* Return the capture 4 value */
+      tmpreg =   htim->Instance->CCR4;
+
+      break;
+    }
+
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+  return tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group9 TIM Callbacks functions
+ *  @brief    TIM Callbacks functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### TIM Callbacks functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+   This section provides TIM callback functions:
+   (+) Timer Period elapsed callback
+   (+) Timer Output Compare callback
+   (+) Timer Input capture callback
+   (+) Timer Trigger callback
+   (+) Timer Error callback
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Period elapsed callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the __HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+
+}
+/**
+  * @brief  Output Compare callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM OC handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the __HAL_TIM_OC_DelayElapsedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+/**
+  * @brief  Input Capture callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM IC handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the __HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  PWM Pulse finished callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the __HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Hall Trigger detection callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Timer error callback in non blocking mode 
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Exported_Functions_Group10 Peripheral State functions 
+ *  @brief   Peripheral State functions 
+ *
+@verbatim 
+  ==============================================================================
+                        ##### Peripheral State functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+    This subsection permit to get in run-time the status of the peripheral 
+    and the data flow.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM Base state
+  * @param  htim : TIM Base handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_Base_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM OC state
+  * @param  htim : TIM Ouput Compare handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_OC_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM PWM state
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_PWM_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM Input Capture state
+  * @param  htim : TIM IC handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_IC_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM One Pulse Mode state
+  * @param  htim : TIM OPM handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_OnePulse_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM Encoder Mode state
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIM_Encoder_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @addtogroup TIM_Private_Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA error callback 
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_DMAError(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  HAL_TIM_ErrorCallback(htim);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA Delay Pulse complete callback.
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+  }
+
+  HAL_TIM_PWM_PulseFinishedCallback(htim);
+
+  htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA Capture complete callback.
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_DMACaptureCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_1;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_2;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_3;
+  }
+  else if (hdma == htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4])
+  {
+    htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_4;
+  }
+
+  HAL_TIM_IC_CaptureCallback(htim);
+
+  htim->Channel = HAL_TIM_ACTIVE_CHANNEL_CLEARED;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA Period Elapse complete callback.
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_DMAPeriodElapsedCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  HAL_TIM_PeriodElapsedCallback(htim);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA Trigger callback.
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_DMATriggerCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  HAL_TIM_TriggerCallback(htim);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Base configuration
+  * @param  TIMx : TIM periheral
+  * @param  Structure : TIM Base configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_Base_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_Base_InitTypeDef *Structure)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpcr1 = 0;
+  tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1;
+
+  /* Set TIM Time Base Unit parameters ---------------------------------------*/
+  if (IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE_SELECT_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Select the Counter Mode */
+    tmpcr1 &= ~(TIM_CR1_DIR | TIM_CR1_CMS);
+    tmpcr1 |= Structure->CounterMode;
+  }
+
+  if(IS_TIM_CLOCK_DIVISION_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Set the clock division */
+    tmpcr1 &= ~TIM_CR1_CKD;
+    tmpcr1 |= (uint32_t)Structure->ClockDivision;
+  }
+
+  TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1;
+
+  /* Set the Autoreload value */
+  TIMx->ARR = (uint32_t)Structure->Period ;
+
+  /* Set the Prescaler value */
+  TIMx->PSC = (uint32_t)Structure->Prescaler;
+
+  if (IS_TIM_REPETITION_COUNTER_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Set the Repetition Counter value */
+    TIMx->RCR = Structure->RepetitionCounter;
+  }
+
+  /* Generate an update event to reload the Prescaler 
+     and the repetition counter(only for TIM1 and TIM8) value immediatly */
+  TIMx->EGR = TIM_EGR_UG;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Ouput Compare 1 configuration
+  * @param  TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  OC_Config : The ouput configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_OC1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmrx = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+   /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+  /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+  tmpcr2 =  TIMx->CR2;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+  tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC1M;
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC1S;
+  /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+  tmpccmrx |= OC_Config->OCMode;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+  tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1P;
+  /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+  tmpccer |= OC_Config->OCPolarity;
+
+  if(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(TIMx, TIM_CHANNEL_1))
+  {
+    /* Check parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(OC_Config->OCNPolarity));
+
+    /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1NP;
+    /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+    tmpccer |= OC_Config->OCNPolarity;
+    /* Reset the Output N State */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1NE;
+  }
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Check parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCNIdleState));
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCIdleState));
+
+    /* Reset the Output Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS1;
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS1N;
+    /* Set the Output Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= OC_Config->OCIdleState;
+    /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= OC_Config->OCNIdleState;
+  }
+  /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+  TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+  /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+  TIMx->CCR1 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Ouput Compare 2 configuration
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  OC_Config : The ouput configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_OC2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmrx = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+  /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+  tmpcr2 =  TIMx->CR2;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+  tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_OC2M;
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC2S;
+
+  /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+  tmpccmrx |= (OC_Config->OCMode << 8);
+
+  /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+  tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2P;
+  /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+  tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 4);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(TIMx, TIM_CHANNEL_2))
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(OC_Config->OCNPolarity));
+
+    /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2NP;
+    /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+    tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCNPolarity << 4);
+    /* Reset the Output N State */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2NE;
+
+  }
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Check parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCNIdleState));
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCIdleState));
+
+    /* Reset the Output Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS2;
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS2N;
+    /* Set the Output Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= (OC_Config->OCIdleState << 2);
+    /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= (OC_Config->OCNIdleState << 2);
+  }
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+  TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+  /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+  TIMx->CCR2 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Ouput Compare 3 configuration
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  OC_Config : The ouput configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_OC3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmrx = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3E;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+  /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+  tmpcr2 =  TIMx->CR2;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+  tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC3M;
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC3S;
+  /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+  tmpccmrx |= OC_Config->OCMode;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+  tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3P;
+  /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+  tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 8);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(TIMx, TIM_CHANNEL_3))
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(OC_Config->OCNPolarity));
+
+    /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3NP;
+    /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+    tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCNPolarity << 8);
+    /* Reset the Output N State */
+    tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3NE;
+  }
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    /* Check parameters */
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCNIdleState));
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCIdleState));
+
+    /* Reset the Output Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS3;
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS3N;
+    /* Set the Output Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= (OC_Config->OCIdleState << 4);
+    /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= (OC_Config->OCNIdleState << 4);
+  }
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+  TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+  TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+  /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+  TIMx->CCR3 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Ouput Compare 4 configuration
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  OC_Config : The ouput configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_OC4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, TIM_OC_InitTypeDef *OC_Config)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmrx = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4E;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+  /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+  tmpcr2 =  TIMx->CR2;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+  tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+  /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_OC4M;
+  tmpccmrx &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC4S;
+
+  /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+  tmpccmrx |= (OC_Config->OCMode << 8);
+
+  /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+  tmpccer &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4P;
+  /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+  tmpccer |= (OC_Config->OCPolarity << 12);
+
+  if(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(TIMx))
+  {
+    assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(OC_Config->OCIdleState));
+
+   /* Reset the Output Compare IDLE State */
+    tmpcr2 &= ~TIM_CR2_OIS4;
+    /* Set the Output Idle state */
+    tmpcr2 |= (OC_Config->OCIdleState << 6);
+  }
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+  TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+  TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+  /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+  TIMx->CCR4 = OC_Config->Pulse;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Time Slave configuration
+  * @param  htim: pointer to a TIM_HandleTypeDef structure that contains
+  *                the configuration information for TIM module.
+  * @param  sSlaveConfig: The slave configuration structure
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_SlaveTimer_SetConfig(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+                              TIM_SlaveConfigTypeDef * sSlaveConfig)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+  tmpsmcr = htim->Instance->SMCR;
+
+  /* Reset the Trigger Selection Bits */
+  tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+  /* Set the Input Trigger source */
+  tmpsmcr |= sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger;
+
+  /* Reset the slave mode Bits */
+  tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+  /* Set the slave mode */
+  tmpsmcr |= sSlaveConfig->SlaveMode;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+
+  /* Configure the trigger prescaler, filter, and polarity */
+  switch (sSlaveConfig->InputTrigger)
+  {
+  case TIM_TS_ETRF:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKSOURCE_ETRMODE1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPRESCALER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPrescaler));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+      /* Configure the ETR Trigger source */
+      TIM_ETR_SetConfig(htim->Instance,
+                        sSlaveConfig->TriggerPrescaler,
+                        sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+                        sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_TI1F_ED:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+      /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+      tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+      htim->Instance->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+      tmpccmr1 = htim->Instance->CCMR1;
+
+      /* Set the filter */
+      tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+      tmpccmr1 |= ((sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter) << 4);
+
+      /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+      htim->Instance->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+      htim->Instance->CCER = tmpccer;
+
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_TI1FP1:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+      /* Configure TI1 Filter and Polarity */
+      TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+                               sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+                               sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_TI2FP2:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameters */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERPOLARITY(sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity));
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGERFILTER(sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter));
+
+      /* Configure TI2 Filter and Polarity */
+      TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(htim->Instance,
+                                sSlaveConfig->TriggerPolarity,
+                                sSlaveConfig->TriggerFilter);
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_ITR0:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameter */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_ITR1:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameter */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_ITR2:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameter */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case TIM_TS_ITR3:
+    {
+      /* Check the parameter */
+      assert_param(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+    }
+    break;
+
+  default:
+    break;
+  }
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TI1 as Input.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral.
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+  * @param  TIM_ICSelection : specifies the input to be used.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI:    TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI:  TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC:         TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @retval None
+  * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI2FP1 
+  *       (on channel2 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR1 must be 
+  *        protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+  */
+void TIM_TI1_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+  tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+  /* Select the Input */
+  if(IS_TIM_CC2_INSTANCE(TIMx) != RESET)
+  {
+    tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC1S;
+    tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ICSelection;
+  }
+  else
+  {
+    tmpccmr1 |= TIM_CCMR1_CC1S_0;
+  }
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+  tmpccmr1 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 4) & TIM_CCMR1_IC1F);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP);
+  tmpccer |= (TIM_ICPolarity & (TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP));
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the Polarity and Filter for TI1.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral.
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING   
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING  
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE 
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_TI1_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC1E;
+  tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1F;
+  tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICFilter << 4);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP);
+  tmpccer |= TIM_ICPolarity;
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TI2 as Input.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING   
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING  
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE 
+  * @param  TIM_ICSelection : specifies the input to be used.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI:   TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC:        TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @retval None
+  * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI1FP2 
+  *       (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR1 must be 
+  *        protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+  */
+static void TIM_TI2_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+  tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+  /* Select the Input */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_CC2S;
+  tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICSelection << 8);
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2F;
+  tmpccmr1 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 12) & TIM_CCMR1_IC2F);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+  tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 4) & (TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP));
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the Polarity and Filter for TI2.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral.
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING  
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING 
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_TI2_ConfigInputStage(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC2E;
+  tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC2F;
+  tmpccmr1 |= (TIM_ICFilter << 12);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+  tmpccer |= (TIM_ICPolarity << 4);
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TI3 as Input.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING  
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING 
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+  * @param  TIM_ICSelection : specifies the input to be used.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI:   TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC:        TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @retval None
+  * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI3FP4 
+  *       (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR2 must be 
+  *        protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+  */
+static void TIM_TI3_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC3E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC3E;
+  tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+  /* Select the Input */
+  tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC3S;
+  tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ICSelection;
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC3F;
+  tmpccmr2 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 4) & TIM_CCMR2_IC3F);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC3E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC3P | TIM_CCER_CC3NP);
+  tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 8) & (TIM_CCER_CC3P | TIM_CCER_CC3NP));
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TI4 as Input.
+  * @param  TIMx to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  TIM_ICPolarity : The Input Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_RISING  
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_FALLING 
+  *            @arg TIM_ICPOLARITY_BOTHEDGE
+  * @param  TIM_ICSelection : specifies the input to be used.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_DIRECTTI:   TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_INDIRECTTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+  *            @arg TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC:        TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+  * @param  TIM_ICFilter : Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+  * @note TIM_ICFilter and TIM_ICPolarity are not used in INDIRECT mode as TI4FP3 
+  *       (on channel1 path) is used as the input signal. Therefore CCMR2 must be 
+  *        protected against un-initialized filter and polarity values.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_TI4_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint32_t TIM_ICSelection,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~TIM_CCER_CC4E;
+  tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+  tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+
+  /* Select the Input */
+  tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_CC4S;
+  tmpccmr2 |= (TIM_ICSelection << 8);
+
+  /* Set the filter */
+  tmpccmr2 &= ~TIM_CCMR2_IC4F;
+  tmpccmr2 |= ((TIM_ICFilter << 12) & TIM_CCMR2_IC4F);
+
+  /* Select the Polarity and set the CC4E Bit */
+  tmpccer &= ~(TIM_CCER_CC4P | TIM_CCER_CC4NP);
+  tmpccer |= ((TIM_ICPolarity << 12) & (TIM_CCER_CC4P | TIM_CCER_CC4NP));
+
+  /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+  TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+  TIMx->CCER = tmpccer ;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Selects the Input Trigger source
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  InputTriggerSource : The Input Trigger source.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR0 : Internal Trigger 0
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR1 : Internal Trigger 1
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR2 : Internal Trigger 2
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR3 : Internal Trigger 3
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_TI1F_ED : TI1 Edge Detector
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_TI1FP1 : Filtered Timer Input 1
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_TI2FP2 : Filtered Timer Input 2
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ETRF : External Trigger input
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_ITRx_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef *TIMx, uint16_t InputTriggerSource)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+   /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+   tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+   /* Reset the TS Bits */
+   tmpsmcr &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+   /* Set the Input Trigger source and the slave mode*/
+   tmpsmcr |= InputTriggerSource | TIM_SLAVEMODE_EXTERNAL1;
+   /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+   TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR).
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler : The external Trigger Prescaler.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV1: ETRP Prescaler OFF.
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV2: ETRP frequency divided by 2.
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV4: ETRP frequency divided by 4.
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPRESCALER_DIV8: ETRP frequency divided by 8.
+  * @param  TIM_ExtTRGPolarity : The external Trigger Polarity.
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPOLARITY_INVERTED: active low or falling edge active.
+  *            @arg TIM_ETRPOLARITY_NONINVERTED: active high or rising edge active.
+  * @param  ExtTRGFilter : External Trigger Filter.
+  *          This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_ETR_SetConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+                       uint32_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint32_t ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+  tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+
+  /* Reset the ETR Bits */
+  tmpsmcr &= ~(TIM_SMCR_ETF | TIM_SMCR_ETPS | TIM_SMCR_ECE | TIM_SMCR_ETP);
+
+  /* Set the Prescaler, the Filter value and the Polarity */
+  tmpsmcr |= (uint32_t)(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler | (TIM_ExtTRGPolarity | (ExtTRGFilter << 8)));
+
+  /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+  TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  Channel : specifies the TIM Channel
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4
+  * @param  ChannelState : specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state.
+  *          This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_ENABLE or TIM_CCx_Disable.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIM_CCxChannelCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t ChannelState)
+{
+  uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CC1_INSTANCE(TIMx));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNELS(Channel));
+
+  tmp = TIM_CCER_CC1E << Channel;
+
+  /* Reset the CCxE Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &= ~tmp;
+
+  /* Set or reset the CCxE Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER |=  (uint32_t)(ChannelState << Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim_ex.c b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim_ex.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..416dad8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/stm32cubemx/Drivers/STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver/Src/stm32f1xx_hal_tim_ex.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1857 @@
+/**
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @file    stm32f1xx_hal_tim_ex.c
+  * @author  MCD Application Team
+  * @version V1.0.4
+  * @date    29-April-2016
+  * @brief   TIM HAL module driver.
+  *          This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+  *          functionalities of the Timer Extended peripheral:
+  *           + Time Hall Sensor Interface Initialization
+  *           + Time Hall Sensor Interface Start
+  *           + Time Complementary signal bread and dead time configuration
+  *           + Time Master and Slave synchronization configuration
+  *           + Timer remapping capabilities configuration
+  @verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                      ##### TIMER Extended features #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    The Timer Extended features include:
+    (#) Complementary outputs with programmable dead-time for :
+        (++) Output Compare
+        (++) PWM generation (Edge and Center-aligned Mode)
+        (++) One-pulse mode output
+    (#) Synchronization circuit to control the timer with external signals and to
+        interconnect several timers together.
+    (#) Break input to put the timer output signals in reset state or in a known state.
+    (#) Supports incremental (quadrature) encoder and hall-sensor circuitry for
+        positioning purposes
+
+            ##### How to use this driver #####
+  ==============================================================================
+    [..]
+     (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources by implementing the following functions
+         depending from feature used :
+           (++) Complementary Output Compare : HAL_TIM_OC_MspInit()
+           (++) Complementary PWM generation : HAL_TIM_PWM_MspInit()
+           (++) Complementary One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIM_OnePulse_MspInit()
+           (++) Hall Sensor output : HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspInit()
+
+     (#) Initialize the TIM low level resources :
+        (##) Enable the TIM interface clock using __HAL_RCC_TIMx_CLK_ENABLE();
+        (##) TIM pins configuration
+            (+++) Enable the clock for the TIM GPIOs using the following function:
+              __HAL_RCC_GPIOx_CLK_ENABLE();
+            (+++) Configure these TIM pins in Alternate function mode using HAL_GPIO_Init();
+
+     (#) The external Clock can be configured, if needed (the default clock is the
+         internal clock from the APBx), using the following function:
+         HAL_TIM_ConfigClockSource, the clock configuration should be done before
+         any start function.
+
+     (#) Configure the TIM in the desired functioning mode using one of the
+         initialization function of this driver:
+          (++) HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Init and HAL_TIMEx_ConfigCommutationEvent: to use the
+              Timer Hall Sensor Interface and the commutation event with the corresponding
+              Interrupt and DMA request if needed (Note that One Timer is used to interface
+             with the Hall sensor Interface and another Timer should be used to use
+             the commutation event).
+
+     (#) Activate the TIM peripheral using one of the start functions:
+           (++) Complementary Output Compare : HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start(), HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start_IT()
+           (++) Complementary PWM generation : HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start(), HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start_IT()
+           (++) Complementary One-pulse mode output : HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Start(), HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Start_IT()
+           (++) Hall Sensor output : HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start(), HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start_DMA(), HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start_IT().
+
+
+  @endverbatim
+  ******************************************************************************
+  * @attention
+  *
+  * <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT(c) 2016 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
+  *
+  * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
+  * are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+  *   1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+  *   2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+  *      this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
+  *      and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+  *   3. Neither the name of STMicroelectronics nor the names of its contributors
+  *      may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+  *      without specific prior written permission.
+  *
+  * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+  * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+  * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
+  * DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+  * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+  * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+  * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+  * CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+  * OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+  * OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+  *
+  ******************************************************************************
+*/
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f1xx_hal.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F1xx_HAL_Driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx TIMEx
+  * @brief TIM Extended HAL module driver
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#ifdef HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE) ||                                                   \
+    defined (STM32F103x6) || defined (STM32F103xB) || defined (STM32F103xE) || defined (STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined (STM32F105xC) || defined (STM32F107xC)
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Private_Functions TIMEx Private Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+static void TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t ChannelNState);
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+#endif /* defined(STM32F100xB) || defined(STM32F100xE) ||                                                 */
+       /* defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || */
+       /* defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)                                                    */
+
+/* Exported functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions TIMEx Exported Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group1 Timer Hall Sensor functions
+ *  @brief    Timer Hall Sensor functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                      ##### Timer Hall Sensor functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Initialize and configure TIM HAL Sensor.
+    (+) De-initialize TIM HAL Sensor.
+    (+) Start the Hall Sensor Interface.
+    (+) Stop the Hall Sensor Interface.
+    (+) Start the Hall Sensor Interface and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Hall Sensor Interface and disable interrupts.
+    (+) Start the Hall Sensor Interface and enable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Stop the Hall Sensor Interface and disable DMA transfers.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Hall Sensor Interface and create the associated handle.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Encoder Interface handle
+  * @param  sConfig : TIM Hall Sensor configuration structure
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Init(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_HallSensor_InitTypeDef* sConfig)
+{
+  TIM_OC_InitTypeDef OC_Config;
+
+  /* Check the TIM handle allocation */
+  if(htim == NULL)
+  {
+    return HAL_ERROR;
+  }
+
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(htim->Init.CounterMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CLOCKDIVISION_DIV(htim->Init.ClockDivision));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(sConfig->IC1Polarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(sConfig->IC1Prescaler));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(sConfig->IC1Filter));
+
+  if(htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET)
+  {
+    /* Allocate lock resource and initialize it */
+    htim->Lock = HAL_UNLOCKED;
+    
+    /* Init the low level hardware : GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC and DMA */
+    HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspInit(htim);
+  }
+
+  /* Set the TIM state */
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Configure the Time base in the Encoder Mode */
+  TIM_Base_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &htim->Init);
+
+  /* Configure the Channel 1 as Input Channel to interface with the three Outputs of the  Hall sensor */
+  TIM_TI1_SetConfig(htim->Instance, sConfig->IC1Polarity, TIM_ICSELECTION_TRC, sConfig->IC1Filter);
+
+  /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+  htim->Instance->CCMR1 &= ~TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC;
+  /* Set the IC1PSC value */
+  htim->Instance->CCMR1 |= sConfig->IC1Prescaler;
+
+  /* Enable the Hall sensor interface (XOR function of the three inputs) */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_TI1S;
+
+  /* Select the TIM_TS_TI1F_ED signal as Input trigger for the TIM */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+  htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_TS_TI1F_ED;
+
+  /* Use the TIM_TS_TI1F_ED signal to reset the TIM counter each edge detection */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_SMS;
+  htim->Instance->SMCR |= TIM_SLAVEMODE_RESET;
+
+  /* Program channel 2 in PWM 2 mode with the desired Commutation_Delay*/
+  OC_Config.OCFastMode = TIM_OCFAST_DISABLE;
+  OC_Config.OCIdleState = TIM_OCIDLESTATE_RESET;
+  OC_Config.OCMode = TIM_OCMODE_PWM2;
+  OC_Config.OCNIdleState = TIM_OCNIDLESTATE_RESET;
+  OC_Config.OCNPolarity = TIM_OCNPOLARITY_HIGH;
+  OC_Config.OCPolarity = TIM_OCPOLARITY_HIGH;
+  OC_Config.Pulse = sConfig->Commutation_Delay;
+
+  TIM_OC2_SetConfig(htim->Instance, &OC_Config);
+
+  /* Select OC2REF as trigger output on TRGO: write the MMS bits in the TIMx_CR2
+    register to 101 */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 &= ~TIM_CR2_MMS;
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= TIM_TRGO_OC2REF;
+
+  /* Initialize the TIM state*/
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes the TIM Hall Sensor interface
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_DeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Peripheral Clock */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* DeInit the low level hardware: GPIO, CLOCK, NVIC */
+  HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspDeInit(htim);
+
+  /* Change TIM state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_RESET;
+
+  /* Release Lock */
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Initializes the TIM Hall Sensor MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  DeInitializes TIM Hall Sensor MSP.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspDeInit(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_MspDeInit could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Hall Sensor Interface.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Hall sensor Interface.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Hall Sensor Interface in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Enable the capture compare Interrupts 1 event */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Hall Sensor Interface in interrupt mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts event */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Hall Sensor Interface in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @param  pData : The destination Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from TIM peripheral to memory.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+   if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if(((uint32_t)pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  /* Enable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Set the DMA Input Capture 1 Callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMACaptureCplt;
+  /* Set the DMA error callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+  /* Enable the DMA channel for Capture 1*/
+  HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, (uint32_t)pData, Length);
+
+  /* Enable the capture compare 1 Interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Hall Sensor Interface in DMA mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_XOR_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+
+  /* Disable the Input Capture channel 1
+    (in the Hall Sensor Interface the 3 possible channels that are used are TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CHANNEL_2 and TIM_CHANNEL_3) */
+  TIM_CCxChannelCmd(htim->Instance, TIM_CHANNEL_1, TIM_CCx_DISABLE);
+
+
+  /* Disable the capture compare Interrupts 1 event */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#if defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE) ||                                                   \
+    defined (STM32F103x6) || defined (STM32F103xB) || defined (STM32F103xE) || defined (STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined (STM32F105xC) || defined (STM32F107xC)
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group2 Timer Complementary Output Compare functions
+ *  @brief    Timer Complementary Output Compare functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+              ##### Timer Complementary Output Compare functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Start the Complementary Output Compare/PWM.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Output Compare/PWM.
+    (+) Start the Complementary Output Compare/PWM and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Output Compare/PWM and disable interrupts.
+    (+) Start the Complementary Output Compare/PWM and enable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Output Compare/PWM and disable DMA transfers.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation on the complementary
+  *         output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation on the complementary
+  *         output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode
+  *         on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM OC handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Break interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK);
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in interrupt mode
+  *         on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Break interrupt (only if no more channel is active) */
+  tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+  if ((tmpccer & (TIM_CCER_CC1NE | TIM_CCER_CC2NE | TIM_CCER_CC3NE)) == RESET)
+  {
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode
+  *         on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @param  pData : The source Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if(((uint32_t)pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+{
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3,Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+     /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM Output Compare signal generation in DMA mode
+  *         on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM Output Compare handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OCN_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Output Compare interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Capture compare channel N */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group3 Timer Complementary PWM functions
+ *  @brief    Timer Complementary PWM functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                 ##### Timer Complementary PWM functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Start the Complementary PWM.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary PWM.
+    (+) Start the Complementary PWM and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary PWM and disable interrupts.
+    (+) Start the Complementary PWM and enable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary PWM and disable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Start the Complementary Input Capture measurement.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Input Capture.
+    (+) Start the Complementary Input Capture and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Input Capture and disable interrupts.
+    (+) Start the Complementary Input Capture and enable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary Input Capture and disable DMA transfers.
+    (+) Start the Complementary One Pulse generation.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary One Pulse.
+    (+) Start the Complementary One Pulse and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary One Pulse and disable interrupts.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the PWM signal generation on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Enable the complementary PWM output  */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the PWM signal generation on the complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  /* Disable the complementary PWM output  */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode on the
+  *         complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Break interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK);
+
+  /* Enable the complementary PWM output  */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the PWM signal generation in interrupt mode on the
+  *         complementary output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Stop_IT (TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  uint32_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 interrupt */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the complementary PWM output  */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Break interrupt (only if no more channel is active) */
+  tmpccer = htim->Instance->CCER;
+  if ((tmpccer & (TIM_CCER_CC1NE | TIM_CCER_CC2NE | TIM_CCER_CC3NE)) == RESET)
+  {
+    __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_BREAK);
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode on the
+  *         complementary output
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @param  pData : The source Buffer address.
+  * @param  Length : The length of data to be transferred from memory to TIM peripheral
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Start_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t *pData, uint16_t Length)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY))
+  {
+     return HAL_BUSY;
+  }
+  else if((htim->State == HAL_TIM_STATE_READY))
+  {
+    if(((uint32_t)pData == 0 ) && (Length > 0))
+    {
+      return HAL_ERROR;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+      htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+    }
+  }
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC1], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR1, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC2], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR2, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC3], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR3,Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+     /* Set the DMA Period elapsed callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferCpltCallback = TIM_DMADelayPulseCplt;
+
+      /* Set the DMA error callback */
+      htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError ;
+
+      /* Enable the DMA channel */
+      HAL_DMA_Start_IT(htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_CC4], (uint32_t)pData, (uint32_t)&htim->Instance->CCR4, Length);
+
+      /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Enable the complementary PWM output  */
+     TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Enable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM PWM signal generation in DMA mode on the complementary
+  *         output
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  Channel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_3: TIM Channel 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_4: TIM Channel 4 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_PWMN_Stop_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t Channel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, Channel));
+
+  switch (Channel)
+  {
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_1:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC1);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_2:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC2);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_3:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 3 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC3);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    case TIM_CHANNEL_4:
+    {
+      /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 4 DMA request */
+      __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_CC4);
+    }
+    break;
+
+    default:
+    break;
+  }
+
+  /* Disable the complementary PWM output */
+    TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, Channel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+    __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Change the htim state */
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group4 Timer Complementary One Pulse functions
+ *  @brief    Timer Complementary One Pulse functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                ##### Timer Complementary One Pulse functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Start the Complementary One Pulse generation.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary One Pulse.
+    (+) Start the Complementary One Pulse and enable interrupts.
+    (+) Stop the Complementary One Pulse and disable interrupts.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation on the complemetary
+  *         output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Start(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+  {
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, OutputChannel));
+
+  /* Enable the complementary One Pulse output */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, OutputChannel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation on the complementary
+  *         output.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Stop(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, OutputChannel));
+
+  /* Disable the complementary One Pulse output */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, OutputChannel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Starts the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode on the
+  *         complementary channel.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channel to be enabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Start_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, OutputChannel));
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Enable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+  /* Enable the complementary One Pulse output */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, OutputChannel, TIM_CCxN_ENABLE);
+
+  /* Enable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_ENABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+  }
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Stops the TIM One Pulse signal generation in interrupt mode on the
+  *         complementary channel.
+  * @param  htim : TIM One Pulse handle
+  * @param  OutputChannel : TIM Channel to be disabled
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_1: TIM Channel 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_CHANNEL_2: TIM Channel 2 selected
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_OnePulseN_Stop_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t OutputChannel)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN_INSTANCE(htim->Instance, OutputChannel));
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 1 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC1);
+
+  /* Disable the TIM Capture/Compare 2 interrupt */
+  __HAL_TIM_DISABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_CC2);
+
+  /* Disable the complementary One Pulse output */
+  TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(htim->Instance, OutputChannel, TIM_CCxN_DISABLE);
+
+  /* Disable the Main Ouput */
+  __HAL_TIM_MOE_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Disable the Peripheral */
+   __HAL_TIM_DISABLE(htim);
+
+  /* Return function status */
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* defined(STM32F100xB) || defined(STM32F100xE) ||                                                 */
+       /* defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || */
+       /* defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)                                                    */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group5 Peripheral Control functions
+ *  @brief   	Peripheral Control functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                    ##### Peripheral Control functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides functions allowing to:
+    (+) Configure the commutation event in case of use of the Hall sensor interface.
+      (+) Configure Complementary channels, break features and dead time.
+      (+) Configure Master synchronization.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+#if defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE) ||                                                   \
+    defined (STM32F103x6) || defined (STM32F103xB) || defined (STM32F103xE) || defined (STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined (STM32F105xC) || defined (STM32F107xC)
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TIM commutation event sequence.
+  * @note: this function is mandatory to use the commutation event in order to
+  *        update the configuration at each commutation detection on the TRGI input of the Timer,
+  *        the typical use of this feature is with the use of another Timer(interface Timer)
+  *        configured in Hall sensor interface, this interface Timer will generate the
+  *        commutation at its TRGO output (connected to Timer used in this function) each time
+  *        the TI1 of the Interface Timer detect a commutation at its input TI1.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  InputTrigger : the Internal trigger corresponding to the Timer Interfacing with the Hall sensor
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal trigger 0 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal trigger 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal trigger 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal trigger 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_NONE: No trigger is needed
+  * @param  CommutationSource : the Commutation Event source
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_TRGI: Commutation source is the TRGI of the Interface Timer
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_SOFTWARE:  Commutation source is set by software using the COMG bit
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_ConfigCommutationEvent(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t  InputTrigger, uint32_t  CommutationSource)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COMMUTATION_EVENT_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGEREVENT_SELECTION(InputTrigger));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  if ((InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR0) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR1) ||
+      (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR2) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR3))
+  {
+    /* Select the Input trigger */
+    htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+    htim->Instance->SMCR |= InputTrigger;
+  }
+
+  /* Select the Capture Compare preload feature */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCPC;
+  /* Select the Commutation event source */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 &= ~TIM_CR2_CCUS;
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= CommutationSource;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TIM commutation event sequence with interrupt.
+  * @note: this function is mandatory to use the commutation event in order to
+  *        update the configuration at each commutation detection on the TRGI input of the Timer,
+  *        the typical use of this feature is with the use of another Timer(interface Timer)
+  *        configured in Hall sensor interface, this interface Timer will generate the
+  *        commutation at its TRGO output (connected to Timer used in this function) each time
+  *        the TI1 of the Interface Timer detect a commutation at its input TI1.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  InputTrigger : the Internal trigger corresponding to the Timer Interfacing with the Hall sensor
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal trigger 0 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal trigger 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal trigger 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal trigger 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_NONE: No trigger is needed
+  * @param  CommutationSource : the Commutation Event source
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_TRGI: Commutation source is the TRGI of the Interface Timer
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_SOFTWARE:  Commutation source is set by software using the COMG bit
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_ConfigCommutationEvent_IT(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t  InputTrigger, uint32_t  CommutationSource)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COMMUTATION_EVENT_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGEREVENT_SELECTION(InputTrigger));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  if ((InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR0) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR1) ||
+      (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR2) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR3))
+  {
+    /* Select the Input trigger */
+    htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+    htim->Instance->SMCR |= InputTrigger;
+  }
+
+  /* Select the Capture Compare preload feature */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCPC;
+  /* Select the Commutation event source */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 &= ~TIM_CR2_CCUS;
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= CommutationSource;
+
+  /* Enable the Commutation Interrupt Request */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_IT(htim, TIM_IT_COM);
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configure the TIM commutation event sequence with DMA.
+  * @note: this function is mandatory to use the commutation event in order to
+  *        update the configuration at each commutation detection on the TRGI input of the Timer,
+  *        the typical use of this feature is with the use of another Timer(interface Timer)
+  *        configured in Hall sensor interface, this interface Timer will generate the
+  *        commutation at its TRGO output (connected to Timer used in this function) each time
+  *        the TI1 of the Interface Timer detect a commutation at its input TI1.
+  * @note: The user should configure the DMA in his own software, in This function only the COMDE bit is set
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  InputTrigger : the Internal trigger corresponding to the Timer Interfacing with the Hall sensor
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal trigger 0 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal trigger 1 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal trigger 2 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal trigger 3 selected
+  *            @arg TIM_TS_NONE: No trigger is needed
+  * @param  CommutationSource : the Commutation Event source
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_TRGI: Commutation source is the TRGI of the Interface Timer
+  *            @arg TIM_COMMUTATION_SOFTWARE:  Commutation source is set by software using the COMG bit
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_ConfigCommutationEvent_DMA(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, uint32_t  InputTrigger, uint32_t  CommutationSource)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_COMMUTATION_EVENT_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGEREVENT_SELECTION(InputTrigger));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  if ((InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR0) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR1) ||
+      (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR2) || (InputTrigger == TIM_TS_ITR3))
+  {
+    /* Select the Input trigger */
+    htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_TS;
+    htim->Instance->SMCR |= InputTrigger;
+  }
+
+  /* Select the Capture Compare preload feature */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCPC;
+  /* Select the Commutation event source */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 &= ~TIM_CR2_CCUS;
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |= CommutationSource;
+
+  /* Enable the Commutation DMA Request */
+  /* Set the DMA Commutation Callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferCpltCallback = TIMEx_DMACommutationCplt;
+  /* Set the DMA error callback */
+  htim->hdma[TIM_DMA_ID_COMMUTATION]->XferErrorCallback = TIM_DMAError;
+
+  /* Enable the Commutation DMA Request */
+  __HAL_TIM_ENABLE_DMA(htim, TIM_DMA_COM);
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief   Configures the Break feature, dead time, Lock level, OSSI/OSSR State
+  *          and the AOE(automatic output enable).
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @param  sBreakDeadTimeConfig : pointer to a TIM_ConfigBreakDeadConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the BDTR Register configuration  information for the TIM peripheral.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_ConfigBreakDeadTime(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim,
+                                                TIM_BreakDeadTimeConfigTypeDef *sBreakDeadTimeConfig)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSR_STATE(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->OffStateRunMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSI_STATE(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->OffStateIDLEMode));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_LOCK_LEVEL(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->LockLevel));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_DEADTIME(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->DeadTime));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_STATE(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->BreakState));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_POLARITY(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->BreakPolarity));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTOMATIC_OUTPUT_STATE(sBreakDeadTimeConfig->AutomaticOutput));
+
+  /* Process Locked */
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Set the Lock level, the Break enable Bit and the Polarity, the OSSR State,
+     the OSSI State, the dead time value and the Automatic Output Enable Bit */
+  htim->Instance->BDTR = (uint32_t)sBreakDeadTimeConfig->OffStateRunMode  |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->OffStateIDLEMode |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->LockLevel        |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->DeadTime         |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->BreakState       |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->BreakPolarity    |
+                                   sBreakDeadTimeConfig->AutomaticOutput;
+
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+#endif /* defined(STM32F100xB) || defined(STM32F100xE) ||                                                 */
+       /* defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || */
+       /* defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)                                                    */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Configures the TIM in master mode.
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle.
+  * @param  sMasterConfig : pointer to a TIM_MasterConfigTypeDef structure that
+  *         contains the selected trigger output (TRGO) and the Master/Slave
+  *         mode.
+  * @retval HAL status
+  */
+HAL_StatusTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_MasterConfigSynchronization(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim, TIM_MasterConfigTypeDef * sMasterConfig)
+{
+  /* Check the parameters */
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_MASTER_INSTANCE(htim->Instance));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_TRGO_SOURCE(sMasterConfig->MasterOutputTrigger));
+  assert_param(IS_TIM_MSM_STATE(sMasterConfig->MasterSlaveMode));
+
+  __HAL_LOCK(htim);
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_BUSY;
+
+  /* Reset the MMS Bits */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 &= ~TIM_CR2_MMS;
+  /* Select the TRGO source */
+  htim->Instance->CR2 |=  sMasterConfig->MasterOutputTrigger;
+
+  /* Reset the MSM Bit */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR &= ~TIM_SMCR_MSM;
+  /* Set or Reset the MSM Bit */
+  htim->Instance->SMCR |= sMasterConfig->MasterSlaveMode;
+
+  htim->State = HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  __HAL_UNLOCK(htim);
+
+  return HAL_OK;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group6 Extension Callbacks functions
+ *  @brief   Extension Callbacks functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                    ##### Extension Callbacks functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This section provides Extension TIM callback functions:
+    (+) Timer Commutation callback
+    (+) Timer Break callback
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Hall commutation changed callback in non blocking mode
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIMEx_CommutationCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIMEx_CommutationCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Hall Break detection callback in non blocking mode
+  * @param  htim : TIM handle
+  * @retval None
+  */
+__weak void HAL_TIMEx_BreakCallback(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  /* Prevent unused argument(s) compilation warning */
+  UNUSED(htim);
+  /* NOTE : This function Should not be modified, when the callback is needed,
+            the HAL_TIMEx_BreakCallback could be implemented in the user file
+   */
+}
+
+/**
+  * @brief  TIM DMA Commutation callback.
+  * @param  hdma : pointer to DMA handle.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+void TIMEx_DMACommutationCplt(DMA_HandleTypeDef *hdma)
+{
+  TIM_HandleTypeDef* htim = ( TIM_HandleTypeDef* )((DMA_HandleTypeDef* )hdma)->Parent;
+
+  htim->State= HAL_TIM_STATE_READY;
+
+  HAL_TIMEx_CommutationCallback(htim);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#if defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE) ||                                                   \
+    defined (STM32F103x6) || defined (STM32F103xB) || defined (STM32F103xE) || defined (STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined (STM32F105xC) || defined (STM32F107xC)
+
+/** @defgroup TIMEx_Exported_Functions_Group7 Extension Peripheral State functions
+ *  @brief   Extension Peripheral State functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+  ==============================================================================
+                ##### Extension Peripheral State functions #####
+  ==============================================================================
+  [..]
+    This subsection permit to get in run-time the status of the peripheral
+    and the data flow.
+
+@endverbatim
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Return the TIM Hall Sensor interface state
+  * @param  htim : TIM Hall Sensor handle
+  * @retval HAL state
+  */
+HAL_TIM_StateTypeDef HAL_TIMEx_HallSensor_GetState(TIM_HandleTypeDef *htim)
+{
+  return htim->State;
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+#endif /* defined(STM32F100xB) || defined(STM32F100xE) ||                                                 */
+       /* defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || */
+       /* defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)                                                    */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#if defined (STM32F100xB) || defined (STM32F100xE) ||                                                   \
+    defined (STM32F103x6) || defined (STM32F103xB) || defined (STM32F103xE) || defined (STM32F103xG) || \
+    defined (STM32F105xC) || defined (STM32F107xC)
+
+/** @addtogroup TIMEx_Private_Functions
+  * @{
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @brief  Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel xN.
+  * @param  TIMx  to select the TIM peripheral
+  * @param  Channel : specifies the TIM Channel
+  *          This parameter can be one of the following values:
+  *            @arg TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+  *            @arg TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+  *            @arg TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+  * @param  ChannelNState : specifies the TIM Channel CCxNE bit new state.
+  *          This parameter can be: TIM_CCxN_ENABLE or TIM_CCxN_Disable.
+  * @retval None
+  */
+static void TIM_CCxNChannelCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Channel, uint32_t ChannelNState)
+{
+  uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+  tmp = TIM_CCER_CC1NE << Channel;
+
+  /* Reset the CCxNE Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER &=  ~tmp;
+
+  /* Set or reset the CCxNE Bit */
+  TIMx->CCER |=  (uint32_t)(ChannelNState << Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* defined(STM32F100xB) || defined(STM32F100xE) ||                                                 */
+       /* defined(STM32F103x6) || defined(STM32F103xB) || defined(STM32F103xE) || defined(STM32F103xG) || */
+       /* defined(STM32F105xC) || defined(STM32F107xC)                                                    */
+
+#endif /* HAL_TIM_MODULE_ENABLED */
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/